Holy Bible Aionian Edition® ~ Coptic---Sahidic-Bible ~ John 5:19

Answered

Strongs:

g611

Lexicon:

ἀποκρίνω

Greek:

ἀπεκρίνατο

Transliteration:

apekrinato

Usage:

247 times in 7 books, 84 chapters, and 243 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

therefore

Strongs:

g3767

Greek:

οὖν

Transliteration:

oun

Usage:

539 times in 24 books, 158 chapters, and 526 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

therefore/then

Morphhology:

Conjunction

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

οὖν

Transliteration:

oun

Gloss:

therefore/then

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

οὖν

Transliteration:

oun

Gloss:

therefore/then

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

οὖν, Ionic dialect and Doric dialect ὦν (the latter in [Refs 8th c.BC+], adverb certainly, in fact, confirming something, frequently in contrast with something which is not confirmed, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in combination with γε (see. γοῦν), γάρ, οὔτε or μήτε, ὡς, ἐπεί, μέν, etc: 1) really, φημὶ γὰρ οὖν κατανεῦσαι. Κρονίωνα for I declare that Zeus did really promise, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τόφρα γὰρ οὖν ἑπόμεσθα, ὄφρ᾽ for we followed them up to the very point, where, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐλέχθησαν λόγοι ἄπιστοι μὲν ἐνίοισι Ἑλλήνων, ἐλέχθησαν δ᾽ ὦν but they really were spoken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Θηβαῖοι μὲν ταῦτα λέγουσι, Πλαταιῆς δ᾽ οὐχ ὁμολογοῦσι, ἐκ δ᾽ οὖν τῆς γῆς ἀνεχώρησαν at all events they did return, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so δ᾽ οὖν after a parenthesis; εἰ δή τις ὑμῶν οὕτως ἔχει,—οὐκ ἀξιῶ μὲν γὰρ ἔγωγε,—εἰ δ᾽ οὖν but if he is so, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἀλλ᾽ οὖν. γε but at all events, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔμπης οὖν ἐπιμεῖναι ἐς αὔριον to stay nevertheless at least till to-morrow, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὖν concessive, I grant you, τάχ᾽ οὖν τις ἄκων ἔσχε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Τληπόλεμος δ᾽, ἐπεὶ οὖν τράφ᾽ ἐνὶ μεγάρῳ εὐπήκτῳ, αὐτίκα. κατέκτα when once, i.e. as soon as, he had grown up, [Refs]; νεβροί, αἵ τ᾽ ἐπεὶ οὖν ἔκαμον. ἑστᾶσ᾽ which, as soon as they are tired, stand still, [Refs]; to indicate that something foreshadowed has actually occurred, ἀγορήνδε καλέσσατο λαὸν Ἀχιλλεύς, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ οὖν ἤγερθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν δ᾽ ὡς οὖν ἐνόησε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὔτ᾽ οὖν, οὔτε. or οὔτε, οὔτ᾽ οὖν. both = neither. nor, but preferred according as the first or second clause is to be marked by emphasis,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so εἰ, εἴτ᾽ οὖν. if, or if, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴτ᾽ οὖν, εἴτε μὴ γενήσεται whether it shall be so, or no, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ξεῖνος αἴτ᾽ ὦν ἀστός, i.e. αἴτε ξ. αἴτ᾽ ὦν ἀ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] even as, just as, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ δ᾽ ἔστιν, ὥσπερ οὖν ἔστι, θεός if he is, as he in fact is, a god, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; for μὲν οὖν, see at {μέν} [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) added to indefinite Prons. and adverbs, like Latin cunque, ὅστις whoever, ὁστισοῦν whosoever; ὅπως how, ὁπωσοῦν howsoever; ἄλλος ὁστισοῦν another, be he who he may; so ὁποιοσοῦν, ὁποιοστισοῦν, ὁποσοσοῦν, ὁπωσδηποτοῦν, ὁπητιοῦν, ὁποθενοῦν, etc, (see entry). II) to continue a narrative, so, then, καὶ τὰ μὲν οὖν. θῆκαν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὅτ᾽ οὖν since, then, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ζεῖ οὖν ἐν τούτῳ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] is very common in this sense; so δ᾽ οὖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὖν is also used alone merely to resume after a parenthesis or long protasis, well, as I was saying, ὦ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, χρήσαντος τοῦ θεοῦ, ὑμεας γὰρ πυνθάνομαι προεστάναι,—ὑμέας ὦν. προσκαλέομαι. [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) ὦν is frequently inserted by [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle, οἱ δὲ φέροντες ἐς τὴν ἀγορήν, ἀπ᾽ ὦν ἔδοντο[Refs]; so in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: this tmesis is rare in Attic dialect, ὥστε γε καὐτόν σε κατ᾽ οὖν ἔβαλεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but occurs in later writers, Dorieus cited in [Refs 3rd c.BC+] III) in inferences, then, therefore, not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in a statement, [Refs]; very common from [Refs 5th c.BC+] downwards; so καὶ σὺ οὖν you too therefore, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare οὐ γὰρ οὖν, τοιγαροῦν: strengthened, δὴ οὖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in questions, τίς οὖν ὁ λύσων σ᾽ ἐστίν ; [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; ἆρ᾽ οὖν δή ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί οὖν δή ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strongs

Word:

οὖν

Transliteration:

oûn

Pronounciation:

oon

Language:

Greek

Definition:

(adverbially) certainly, or (conjunctionally) accordingly; and (so, truly), but, now (then), so (likewise then), then, therefore, verily, wherefore; apparently a primary word

<the>

Strongs:

g3588

Greek:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Usage:

20754 times in 27 books, 260 chapters, and 7041 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Definite article Nominative Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a SPECIFIC male person or thing that is doing something

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strongs

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Pronounciation:

to

Language:

Greek

Definition:

the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article

Jesus

Strongs:

g2424G

Strongs extended:

g2424, g2424G, g2424H, g2424I, g2424J, g2424K

Greek:

Ἰησοῦς

Transliteration:

Iēsous

Usage:

987 times in 26 books, 208 chapters, and 940 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

and

Strongs:

g2532

Lexicon:

καί

Greek:

καὶ

Transliteration:

kai

Usage:

9585 times in 27 books, 260 chapters, and 5307 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Morphhology:

Conjunction

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

καί

Transliteration:

kai

Gloss:

and

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

καί

Transliteration:

kai

Gloss:

and

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.

Strongs

Word:

καί

Transliteration:

kaí

Pronounciation:

kahee

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Conjunction

Definition:

and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force

was saying

Strongs:

g3004G

Strongs extended:

g3004, g3004G, g3004H

Lexicon:

λέγω

Greek:

ἔλεγεν

Transliteration:

elegen

Usage:

1311 times in 25 books, 202 chapters, and 1211 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

to them;

Strongs:

g846

Lexicon:

αὐτός

Greek:

αὐτοῖς·

Transliteration:

autois

Usage:

5870 times in 27 books, 254 chapters, and 3809 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Amen

Strongs:

g281

Lexicon:

ἀμήν

Greek:

ἀμὴν

Transliteration:

amēn

Usage:

155 times in 24 books, 81 chapters, and 140 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Amen

Strongs:

g281

Lexicon:

ἀμήν

Greek:

ἀμὴν

Transliteration:

amēn

Usage:

155 times in 24 books, 81 chapters, and 140 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

I say

Strongs:

g3004G

Strongs extended:

g3004, g3004G, g3004H

Greek:

λέγω

Transliteration:

legō

Usage:

1311 times in 25 books, 202 chapters, and 1211 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

to you;

Strongs:

g4771

Lexicon:

σύ

Greek:

ὑμῖν·

Transliteration:

humin

Usage:

3082 times in 27 books, 252 chapters, and 2094 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

not

Strongs:

g3756

Greek:

οὐ

Transliteration:

ou

Usage:

1693 times in 27 books, 246 chapters, and 1438 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

no

Morphhology:

Negative Particle Negative Negative

Grammar:

introducing a negative

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

οὐ

Transliteration:

ou

Gloss:

no

Morphhology:

Greek Particle Neuter

Definition:

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין,אַיִן,לֹא;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf. μή); 1) absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. 2) Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς. οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל. לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ. ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2 o, al; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. 3) With another negative, (a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al; (b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. 4) With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog, Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. 5) Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

οὐ

Transliteration:

ou

Gloss:

no

Morphhology:

Greek Particle Neuter

Definition:

οὐ, the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+] I) as the negative of single words, II) as the negative of the sentence. I) οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) as negativing the whole sentence, II.1) οὐ is frequently used alone, sometimes with the ellipsis of a definite Verb, οὔκ (i.e. ἀποκερῇ), ἄν γε ἐμοὶ πείθῃ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes as negativing the preceding sentence, [Refs 5th c.BC+] and the accusative; sometimes without μά, οὐ τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν πρόμον Ἅλιον [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) with indicative of statement, τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ φθίνει Κροίσου φιλόφρων ἀρετά [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.3) with subjunctive in future sense, only in Epic dialect, οὐ γάρ τίς με βίῃ γε ἑκὼν ἀέκοντα δίηται [Refs] II.4) with optative in potential sense (without ἄν or κεν), also Epic dialect, ὃ οὐ δύο γ᾽ ἄνδρε φέροιεν [Refs] II.5) with optative and ἄν, κείνοισι δ᾽ ἂν οὔ τις. μαχέοιτο [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.6) in dependent clauses οὐ is used, II.6.a) with ὅτι or ὡς, after Verbs of saying, knowing, and showing, ἐκ μέν τοι ἐρέω. ὡς ἐγὼ οὔ τι ἑκὼν κατερύκομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so with indicative or optative and ἄν, ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μωροὶ ἦσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] in such sentences, see at {μή} [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.6.b) in all causal sentences, and in temporal and Relat. sentences unless there is conditional or final meaning, χωσαμένη, ὅ οἱ οὔ τι θαλύσια. ῥέξε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in causal relative sentences, οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially in the combinations, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐ, as οὐκ ἔστ᾽ ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.6.c) after ὥστε with indicative or optative with ἄν, ὥστ᾽ οὐ δυνατόν σ᾽ εἵργειν ἔσται [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive is almost invariably due to indirect speech, ὥστ᾽ οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι (for οὐκ αἰσχύνονται) [Refs 5th c.BC+]—Rarely not in indirect speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.7) in a conditional clause μή is necessary, except, II.7.a) in [Refs 8th c.BC+] clause precedes the apodosis and the verb is indicative, εἰ δέ μοι οὐκ ἐπέεσσ᾽ ἐπιπείσεται [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.7.b) when the εἰ clause is really causal, as after Verbs expressing surprise or emotion, μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.7.c) when οὐ belongs closely to the next word (see. [Refs 4th c.BC+], or is quoted unchanged, εἰ, ὡς νῦν φήσει, οὐ παρεσκευάσατο [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἰ δ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ ἐστί (i.e. ὥσπερ λέγεις), τίνι τρόπῳ διεφθάρη ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.8) οὐ is used with infinitive in indirect speech, when it represents the indicative of orat. recta, φαμὲν δέ οἱ οὐ τελέεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; sometimes we have οὐ and μή in consecutive clauses, οἶμαι σοῦ κάκιον οὐδὲν ἂν τούτων κρατύνειν μηδ᾽ ἐπιθύνειν χερί [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.9) οὐ is used with the participle, when it can be resolved into a finite sentence with οὐ, as after Verbs of knowing and showing, τὸν κατθανόνθ᾽ ὁρῶντες οὐ τιμώμενον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or into a causal sentence, τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or into a concessive sentence, δόξω γυναῖκα καίπερ οὐκ ἔχων ἔχειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] and participle, ὡς οὐχὶ συνδράσουσα νουθετεῖς τάδε [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—for exceptions, see at {μή} [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.9.b) when the participle is used with the Article, μή is generally used, unless there is a distinct reference to a fact, when οὐ is occasionally found, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτι [πόλεως] ὁρμώμενοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.10) Adjectives and abstract Substantives with the article commonly take μή (see. μή [Refs 5th c.BC+] is occasionally used, τὰς οὐκ ἀναγκαίας πόσεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν the non- dissolution of the bridges, the fact of their notbeing broken up, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so without the article, ἐν οὐ καιπῷ [Refs] II.11) for οὐ μή, see entry II.12) in questions οὐ ordinarily expects a positive answer, οὔ νυ καὶ ἄλλοι ἔασι.; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐχ ὁράᾳς.; dost thou not see? [NT+8th c.BC+]: the diphthong is genuine and always written ου (ουκ, ουδε, etc.) in early Inscrr, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οὐ abbreviated ο, Suid. see at {Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον}. H) ACCENTUATION. οὐ is oxytone accusative to Hdn.Gr.1.494 (text doubtfulin 504): [Refs 8th c.BC+] H.I) οὐ in connexion with other Particles will be found in alphabetical order, οὐ γάρ, οὐ μή, etc.—The corresponding forms of μή should be compared.

Strongs

Word:

οὐ

Transliteration:

ou

Pronounciation:

ookh

Language:

Greek

Definition:

the absolute negative (compare g3361 (μή)) adverb; no or not; + long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, + nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but; a primary word

is able

Strongs:

g1410

Lexicon:

δύναμαι

Greek:

δύναται

Transliteration:

dunatai

Usage:

210 times in 19 books, 117 chapters, and 201 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

be able

Morphhology:

Verb Present Middle or Passive Deponent Indicative 3rd Singular

Grammar:

an ACTION that happens - by a person or thing being discussed

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

δύναμαι

Transliteration:

dunamai

Gloss:

be able

Morphhology:

Greek Verb

Definition:

δύναμαι, depon, [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres, Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al; with inf. aor, Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol, to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

δύναμαι

Transliteration:

dunamai

Gloss:

be able

Morphhology:

Greek Verb

Definition:

δύνᾰμαι [ῠ], 2nd pers. singular δύνασαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect δύνᾳ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; δύνῃ is subjunctive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural δυνέαται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive δύνωμαι, Ionic dialect 2nd pers. singular δύνηαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect 2nd pers. singular ἐδύνω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἐδυνέατο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future δυνήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect δυνᾱσοῦμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐδυνησάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect δυν- [Refs]; subjunctive δυνήσωνται [Refs 7th c.BC+], never in good Attic dialect, falsa lectio in [Refs 4th c.BC+]passive forms, Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, Lyric poetry, ἐδυνάσθην or δυνάσθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect Prose ἐδυνήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δεδύνημαι [Refs 4th c.BC+] —The double augment ἠδυνάμην is Attic dialect accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+], but Ionic dialect accusative to [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἠδύνω is required by metre in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; both forms occur in later writers: ἠδυνήθην occurs in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is a late form frequently in Papyrus as [Refs 2nd c.BC+] [ῠ, except in δῡναμένοιο [Refs 8th c.BC+] I) to be able, strong enough to do, with infinitive present et aorist, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: future infinitive is falsa lectio (πείσειν for πείθειν) in [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc: frequently absolutely, with infinitive supplied from the context, εἰ δύνασαί γε if at least thou canst (i.e. περισχέσθαι), [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also with accusative pronoun or adjective, ὅσσον δύναμαι χερσίν τε ποσίν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μέγα δυνάμενος very powerful, mighty, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μέγα δύναται, multum valet, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οἱ δυνάμενοι men of power, rank, and influence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ δυνάμενοι, opposed to οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; opposed to οἱ πένητες, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; δυνάμενος παρά τινι having influence with him, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. τοῖς χρήμασι, τῷ σώματι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ δυνάμενος one that can maintain himself, [Refs]; of things, [διαφέρει] οἷς δύνανται differ in their potentialities, [Refs 3rd c.AD+] I.2) of moral possibility, to be able, dare, bear to do a thing, mostly with negative, οὔτε τελευτὴν ποιῆσαι δύναται [Refs 8th c.BC+] I.2.b) enjoy a legal right, δ. τῆς γεωργίας ἀπηλλάχθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+] I.3) with ὡς and superlative, ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα as secretly as they could, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡς δύναμαι μάλιστα κατατείνας as forcibly as I possibly can, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; simply ὡς ἐδύνατο in the best way he could, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) to be equivalent to, λόγοι ἔργα δυνάμενοι words that are as good as deeds, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.1) of money, to be worth, with accusative, ὁ σίγλος δύναται ἑπτὰ ὀβολούς [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, pass, be current, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II.2) of Number, etc, to be equal or equivalent to, τριηκόσιαι γενεαὶ δυνέαται μύρια ἔτεα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δυνήσεται τὴν ὑποτείνουσαν will be equivalent to the hypotenuse, [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.3) of words, signify, mean, [Refs 5th c.BC+]is equivalent to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3.b) avail to produce, οὐδένα καιρὸν δύναται brings no advantage, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3.c) of things, mean, 'spell', τὸ τριβώνιον τί δύνατα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἱ ἀγγελίαι τοῦτο δύνανται they mean this much, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) in Mathematics texts, δύνασθαί τι to be equivalent when squared to a number or area, τοῖς ἐπιπέδοις ἃ δύνανται in the areas of which they [the lines] are the roots, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ΒΓ τῆς Α μεῖζον δύναται τῇ ΔΖ the square on ΒΓ is greater than the square on A by the square on ΔΖ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; αἱ δυνάμεναι αὐτά [τὰ μεγέθη] the lines representing their square roots,[Refs]; αὐξήσεις δυνάμεναί τε καὶ δυναστευόμεναι increments both in the roots and powers of numbers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ δυναμένη, [Refs 4th c.BC+] name for the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle, [Refs 3rd c.AD+] II.4.b) of numbers multiplied together, come to, [Refs 3rd c.AD+] III) impersonal, οὐ δύναται, with aorist infinitive, it cannot be, is not to be, τοῖσι Σπαρτιήτῃσι καλλιερῆσαι οὐκ ἐδύνατο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δύναται it is possible, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strongs

Word:

δύναμαι

Transliteration:

dýnamai

Pronounciation:

doo'-nam-ahee

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Verb

Definition:

to be able or possible; be able, can (do, + -not), could, may, might, be possible, be of power; of uncertain affinity

the

Strongs:

g3588

Greek:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Usage:

20754 times in 27 books, 260 chapters, and 7041 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Definite article Nominative Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a SPECIFIC male person or thing that is doing something

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strongs

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Pronounciation:

to

Language:

Greek

Definition:

the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article

Son

Strongs:

g5207

Lexicon:

υἱός

Greek:

υἱὸς

Transliteration:

huios

Usage:

382 times in 20 books, 135 chapters, and 348 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

son

Morphhology:

Noun Nominative Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a male PERSON OR THING that is doing something

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

υἱός

Transliteration:

uhios

Gloss:

son

Morphhology:

Greek Noun Male

Definition:

υἱός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX very frequently and nearly always for בֵּן, Gen.4:17, al; for בַּר, Dan LXX TH 7:13, al; etc;], a son; 1) in the ordinary sense: Mat.10:37, Mrk.9:17, Luk.1:13, al. mult; omitted with the art. of origin (WM, §30, 3; Bl, §35, 2), τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, Act.13:22 (LXX); also with genitive anarth. (cl.), Σώπατρος Πύρρου Βεροιαῖος, Act.20:4; with adj, προτότοκος, Luk.2:7; μονογένης, Luk.7:12; opposite to νόθος, Heb.12:8; in a wider sense, of posterity: ὁ υἱ. Δαυΐδ, of the Messiah (cf. Dalman, Words, 316ff; DCG, ii, 653f.), Mat.22:42, 45 Mrk.12:35, 37 Luk.20:41, 44 al; υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ, (cf. υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, Hom, Il., i, 162, al.), Mat.27:9, Act.9:15, al. 2) Metaphorical; (a) as belonging to, being connected with or having the quality of that which follows (a usage mainly due to translation from a Semitic original; cf. Deiss, BS, 161ff; Dalman, Words, 115f; DCG, ii, 652f.): τ. πονεροῦ (διαβόλου), Mat.13:38, Act.13:10; τ. νυμφῶνος (see: νυμφών), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:19, al; τ. φωτός (Lft, Notes, 74), Luk.16:8, Jhn.12:36, 1Th.5:5; τ. εἰρεήμης, Luk.10:6; γεέννης, Mat.23:15; τ. ἀπωλείας, Jhn.17:12, 2Th.2:3; τ. αἰῶνος τούτου, Luk.16:8 20:34; τ. ἀπειθειάς, Eph.2:2 5:6; βροντῆς, Mrk.3:17; τ. ἀναστάσεως, Luk.20:36; παρακλήσεως, Act.4:36; τ. προφητῶν κ. τ. διαθήκης, Act.3:25; (b) υἱὸς τ. θεοῦ (cf. Dalman, Words, 268ff; Deiss, BS, 166f; DB, iv, 570 ff; DCG, ii, 654ff.), of men, as partakers of the Divine nature and of the life to come: Mat.5:9, Luk.20:36, Rom.8:14 9:26, al; υἱοὶ (κ. θυγατέρες) τ. ὑψίστου, Luk.6:35, 2Co.6:18; in an unique sense of Jesus, Mat.4:3 8:29 28:19, Mrk.3:4, Luk.4:41, Jhn.9:35 11:27, al; ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱ. τ. θεοῦ ζῶντος (τ. εὐλογητοῦ), Mat.16:16, Mrk.14:61; (with) (ὁ) υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου (in LXX for Heb. בּן אדם, Aram, בּר אנשׁ; cf. Dalman, Words, 234ff; DB, iv, 579ff; DCG, ii, 659ff; Westc, St. John, i, 74ff; other reff. in Swete, Mk, 2:10), based on the Aram. of Dan.7:13, where the phrase, like the corresponding Heb. (as in Psa.8:5), means a man, one of the species, and indicates the human appearance of the person in question. It is used of the Messiah in Enoch, with 46, §1-4, also in II Est.13:3, 12, al. Our Lord first makes the phrase a title, using the def. art. It seems to combine the ideas of his true humanity and representative character. Exc. in Act.7:56 and (anarth.) Rev.1:13 14:14, it is used of Jesus only by himself: Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:10, Luk.5:24, Jhn.1:52, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

υἱός

Transliteration:

uhios

Gloss:

son

Morphhology:

Greek Noun Male

Definition:

υἱός, ὁ (written ϝηιός in Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. [Refs 6th c.BC+] —in earlier _Attic dialect_ and other Inscrr. inflected as a ῠ-stem (like πῆχυς), _nominative_ υἱύς (written huihus)[Refs]; dative υἱεῖ: dual υἱεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+], written ηυιε in [Refs 5th c.BC+] are rejected by [Refs 2nd c.AD+], Thom.Mag.p.367 R, as not Attic dialect, though the two latter forms are used by later writers (as υἱέα [Refs 3rd c.BC+] is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is mentioned as a form that would be regular by [Refs] —Homer uses _nominative_ υἱός (very frequently); genitive υἱοῦ only in [Refs 8th c.BC+], elsewhere υἱέο; dative υἱέϊ or υἱε; accusative υἱέα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: plural, nominative υἱέες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative υἱοῖσι (ν) only [Refs 8th c.BC+], belongs solely to later Epic dialect poets, as [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (υιυις lapis); accusative υἱύν [Refs]; genitive υἱέος [Refs 6th c.BC+]; but υἱοῦ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; nominative plural υἱέες [Refs]; accusative plural υἱύνς [Refs 8th c.BC+] which have ρα = ṛ, cf. Sanskrit pitṛ[snull]u); ὑέεσσι [Refs]; υἷος in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is nominative rather than genitive in [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; a nominative ὑϊς (scanned?~X) [Refs 6th c.BC+]-in Attic dialect Inscrr. down to [Refs 5th c.BC+] reappears under the Empire; in Plato codex A usually has ὑιος, which is found also in T, codex B always has υἱός, editors restore ὑό; accusative υἱόν is recommended by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] [same place]; in Inscrr. of Pergamon, Magnesia, and Delphi, and in non-literary Papyri, ὑός is at all times less common than υἱός:—ὁ υεἱός [Refs]:—son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; υἱὸν ποιεῖσθαί τινα to adopt as a son, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; υἱεῖς ἄνδρες grown-up sons, [Refs 4th c.BC+] Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely of animals, [NT] 2) periphrastic, υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, for Ἀχαιοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 3) generally, child, and so υἱ. ἄρρην male child, [NT+3rd c.AD+] 4) frequently in [Refs] years old, [LXX]; υἱοὶ ἀδικίας [Refs]hostages, [LXX+NT] 5) in some dialects, including the Ionic dialect Prose of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is rare in Trag, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 6) as a general term of affection, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; υἱέ, an author's address to the reader, [LXX] 7) δάμου υἱός, υἱὸς πόλεως, Ἑλλάδος, as titles of honour, [Refs 1st c.AD+] 8) υἱοὶ ἀνθρώπων sons of men, periphrastic for men (compare above 2,4), [LXX]; οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀ.[LXX+NT]man, [LXX]; of the Messiah,[LXX+NT]; used by Jesus of himself, [NT] (by Stephen recalling the words of Jesus, [NT] 9) υἱοὶ Θεοῦ sons of God, implying inheritors of the nature of God [NT]; implying participants in the glory of God, [Refs] 9.b) of Jesus, τὸ γεννώμενον κληθήσεται υἱὸς Θεοῦ [Refs]; ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ, [NT] 9.c) Θεοῦ υἱός, = Latin [Refs] filius, patronymic of Augustus, [Refs 4th c.BC+]. [Hom.sometimes has the first syllable short in nominative, vocative and accusative singular, οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Simon. [prev. cited] seems to have used a monosyllable nominative υἷς, and Hdn.Gr. may have read it as ὕις, but this is uncertain, as in [Refs 8th c.BC+] does not occur.] (Prob. from *sū-yú-s, cf. Sanskrit sūte 'procreate', Tocharian (A-dialogue) se, (B-dialogue) soyä 'son'; different suffix in *sū-nu-s, Sanskrit sūnūs, etc, and in *s[ucaron]-nu-s, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] sunu, etc. (all = son); *sūyú- perhaps became *s[ucaron]wyú, then *suiwú; υἱός and υἱόν perhaps by dissimilation from υἱύς υἱύν, since the o-stem forms appear first where υ-υ would otherwise be repeated; ὗϊς (ὑΐς) may be another dissimilation; the precise origin of υἷος υἷι υἷες etc. is uncertain.)

Strongs

Word:

υἱός

Transliteration:

huiós

Pronounciation:

hwee-os'

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Noun Masculine

Definition:

a "son" (sometimes of animals), used very widely of immediate, remote or figuratively, kinship; child, foal, son; apparently a primary word

to do

Strongs:

g4160G

Strongs extended:

g4160, g4160G, g4160H, g4160I, g4160J

Lexicon:

ποιέω

Greek:

ποιεῖν

Transliteration:

poiein

Usage:

566 times in 26 books, 186 chapters, and 509 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

of

Strongs:

g575

Lexicon:

ἀπό

Greek:

ἀφ᾽

Transliteration:

aph᾽

Usage:

684 times in 27 books, 215 chapters, and 624 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

away from

Morphhology:

Preposition

Grammar:

relating it to another person or thing

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ἀπό

Transliteration:

apo

Gloss:

away from

Morphhology:

Greek Preposition

Definition:

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf, Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ,בְּ,מִן;] from (i.e. from the exterior). 1) Of separation and cessation; (1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al; (2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl, §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al; also after verbs of eating, etc; (3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss, BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc; ἀνάθεμα ἀ, Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ, Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss, BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; (4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); (5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc, Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc, Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; (6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. 2) Of origin; (1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, (a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; (b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al; (with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; (d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc, Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); (2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc; Bl, §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). 3) Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl, §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. 4) In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ἀπό

Transliteration:

apo

Gloss:

away from

Morphhology:

Greek Preposition

Definition:

ἀπό, Aeolic dialect, Thess, [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit A) ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.] A.I) OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.1) of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly of the cause or ground, ἐξ ὧν προηγώνισθε καὶ ἀφ᾽ ὧν εἰκάζω[Refs 5th c.BC+]:— frequently of warriors fighting from chariots, etc, οἱ μὲν ἀφ᾽ ἵππων, οἱ δ᾽ ἀ. νηῶν. μάχοντο[Refs 8th c.BC+]; λαμπὰς ἔσται ἀφ᾽ ἵππων on horseback, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀμμάτων ἄπο. κατέσταζον γένυν, of tears, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.2) of Position, away from, far from, μένων ἀ. ἧς ἀλόχοιο[Refs 8th c.BC+] to live apart from a man or husband, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν, ἀπ᾽ οὔατος, far from sight or hearing, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σπεύδειν ἀ. ῥυτῆρος far from, i.e. without using the rein, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in measurement of distances, ὅσον ιέ στάδια ἀ. Φυλῆς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; but later the numeral follows ἀ, πηγὰς ἔχων ἀ. μ σταδίων τῆς θαλάσσης[Refs 1st c.BC+]; κατεστρατοπέδευσεν ἀ. ν σταδίων fifty stades away, [Refs 1st c.AD+] A.I.3) of the mind, ἀ. θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδὲν ἀ. τρόπου not without reason, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἀ. σκοποῦ, καιροῦ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.4) in pregnant sense, with Verbs of rest, previous motion being implied (compare ἐκ), ἀνὰ δ᾽ ἐβόασεν. ἀ. πέτρας σταθείς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ.τῆς ἐμῆς κεφαλῆς τὴν [ἐκείνου] κεφαλὴν ἀναδήσω, i. e. taking the chaplet off my head, and placing it on his, [Refs 5th c.BC+] is more common, ἁψαμένη βρόχον ἀ. μελάθρου[Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.5) with the Article, where the sense of motion often disappears, οἱ ἀ. τῶν οἰκιῶν φεύγουσιν, i.e. οἱ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις φεύγουσιν ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἀ. τῶν πύργων. ἐπαρήξουσι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἱ ἵπποι αἱ ἀ. τοῦ ἅρματος variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.6) partitive, λαχὼν ἀ. ληΐδος αἶσαν part taken from the booty, a share of it, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.7) in Mathematics texts, of figures described upon a base, κῶνον ἀναγράφειν ἀ. κύκλου[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; τὸ ἀ. τῆς AB τετράγωνον the square on AB, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; εἴδεα ἀ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.I.8) ἀ. ἀνθρώπου ἕως γυναικός man and woman, [LXX]; ἀ. ἀρσενικοῦ ἕως θηλυκοῦ [prev. work] LXX.Num.5.3. A.I.9) from being, instead of, ἀθανάταν ἀ. θνατᾶς. ἐποίησας Βερενίκαν[Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.I.10) privative, free from, without, ἀ. πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας[Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ἀ. ζημίας[Refs 3rd c.AD+] A.II) OF TIME, from, after, [Refs 8th c.BC+] rising up from, i.e. after,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. δείπνου εἶναι or γενέσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in narrative, τὸ ἀ. τούτου or το̄δε, from this point onwards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; more often ἀπ᾽ or ἀφ᾽ οὗ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εὐθὺς ἀ. παλαιοῦ, ἀ. τοῦ πάνυ ἀρχαίου, of olden time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀφ᾽ ἑσπέρας from the beginning of evening, i.e. at eventide, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. πρώτου ὕπνου[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ ἀγροῦ fresh from field-work, [NT+5th c.BC+]; χρονίζειν ἀ. τοῦ καιροῦ tarry beyond the time, [LXX]; ἀ. τέλους ἐννέα μηνῶν at the end of,[Refs 1st c.AD+]; οἱ ἀ. ὑπατείας, = consulares, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; but ἀ. τινος the freedman of, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] A.III) OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc: A.III.1) of that from which one is born, οὐ γὰρ ἀ. δρυός ἐσσι οὐδ᾽ ἀ. πέτρης not sprung from oak or rock, [Refs 8th c.BC+] immediate, descent, τοὺς μὲν ἀ. θεῶν, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν θεῶν γεγονότας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τρίτος ἀ. Διός third in descent from Zeus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἀ. γένους τινός his descendants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: of the place one springs from, ἵπποι. ποταμοῦ ἄπο Σελλήεντος[Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III.1.b) metaphorically of things, Χαρίτων ἄπο κάλλος ἔχουσαι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεῶν ἄπο μήδεα εἰδώς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ἀ. τῶν πολεμίων φόβος fear inspired by the enemy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.1.c) of persons, οἱ ἀ. τῆς χώρας, τῆς πόλεως, country folk, townsfolk, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; and so of connexion with the founder or leader of a sect, οἱ ἀ. Πυθαγόρου[Refs 1st c.AD+]; οἱ ἀ. τοῦ περιπάτου, ἀ. τῆς Στοᾶς, etc, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] stage players, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ὁ ἀφ᾽ ἑστίας παῖς, see at {ἑστί; ἀπ᾽ ἐξωμίδος} with only an ἐξωμίς, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] A.III.2) of the material from or of which a thing is made, εἵματα ἀ. ξύλου πεποιημένα[NT+5th c.BC+] of or weighing [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κρᾶσις ἀ. τε τῆς ἡδονῆς συγκεκραμένη καὶ ἀ. τῆς λύπης[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so, by an extension of this use, εἰδεχθής τις ἀ. τοῦ προσώπου ugly of countenance, [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.III.3) of the instrument from or by which a thing is done, τοὺς. πέφνεν ἀπ᾽ ἀργυρέοιο βιοῖο by arrow shot from silver bow, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γυμνάζεσθαι ἀ. σκελῶν, χειρῶν, τραχήλου, [LXX+5th c.BC+] A.III.4) of the person from whom an act comes, i.e. by whom it is done, οὐδὲν μέγα ἔργον ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so τἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, τἀπὸ σοῦ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in later Greek frequently of the direct agent, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; in codices this may sometimes be due to confusion with ὑπό, but[Refs 1st c.AD+] A.III.5) of the source from which life, power, etc, are sustained, ζῆν ἀπ᾽ ὕλης ἀγρίης[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. κτήνεων καὶ ἰχθύων[Refs 5th c.BC+]quaestum corpore facere, [Refs 1st c.AD+] A.III.6) of the cause, means, or occasion from, by, or because of which a thing is done, ἀ. τούτου κριοπρόσωπον τὤγαλμα τοῦ Διὸς ποιεῦσι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τινος ἐπαινεῖσθαι, θαυμάζεσθαι, ὠφελεῖσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τοῦ πάθους in consequence of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τρόπαιον ἀ. τινος εἱστήκει on occasion of his defeat, [Refs]; τλήμων οὖσ᾽ ἀπ᾽ εὐτόλμου φρενός[Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀ. δικαιοσύνης by reason of it (variant for{ὑπό}), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τῶν αὐτῶν λημμάτων on the same scale of profits, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; for ὅσον ἀ. βοῆς ἕνεκα, see at {ἕνεκα}: hence in half adverbial usages, ἀ. σπουδῆς in earnest, eagerly, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀ. τοῦἴσου, ἀ. τῆς ἴσης, or ἀπ᾽ ἴσης, equally, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τοῦ εὐθέος straightforwardly, [Refs]; ἀ. τοῦ αὐτομάτου of free-will, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. γλώσσης by word of mouth, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but also, from hearsay, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ ὄψεως at sight, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. χειρὸς λογίζεσθαι on your fingers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀμμάτων ἄπο in the public gaze, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τριηράρχους αἱρεῖσθαι ἀ. τῆς οὐσίας Canon Laws texts cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ from oneself, on one's own account, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. συνθήματος, ἀ. παραγγέλματος, by agreement, by word of command, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. σάλπιγγος by sound of trumpet, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπίτροπος ἀ. τῶν λόγων, = Latin procurator a rationibus, Ann.epigram.[Refs 2nd c.AD+] A.III.7) of the object spoken of, τὰ ἀ. τῆς νήσου οἰκότα ἐστί the things told from or of the island, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) in [Refs 4th c.AD+]; ἀπὺ τᾷ ζᾷ[Refs] B.2) in later Greek ἀπό is found with accusative, [Refs 4th c.AD+] C) in [Refs 8th c.BC+] frequent with Verbs in tmesi, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) IN COMPOSITION (joined with other words), D.1) asunder, as ἀποκόπτω, ἀπολύω, ἀποτέμνω: and hence, away, off, as ἀποβάλλω, ἀποβαίν; denoting, remoual of an accusation, as ἀπολογέομαι, ἀποψηφίζομαι. D.2) finishing off, completing, ἀπεργάζομαι, ἀπανδρόω, ἀπανθρωπίζω, ἀπογλαυκόω. D.3) ceasing from, leaving off, as ἀπαλγέω, ἀποκηδεύω, ἀπολοφύρομαι, ἀποζέω, ἀπανθίζω, ἀφυβρίζω. D.4) back again, as ἀποδίδωμι, ἀπολαμβάνω, ἀπόπλους: also, in full, or what is one's own, as ἀπέχω, ἀπολαμβάνω: frequently it only strengthens the sense of the simple. D.5) by way of abuse, as in ἀποκαλέω. D.6) almost ={ἀ-} privative; sometimes with Verbs, as ἀπαυδάω, ἀπαγορεύ; more frequently with Adjectives, as ἀποχρήματος, ἀπότιμος, ἀπόσιτος, ἀπόφονος. E) ἄπο, by anastrophe for ἀπό, when it follows its Noun, as ὀμμάτων ἄπο[Refs 5th c.BC+]; never in Prose. E.2) ἄπο for ἄπεστι, [Refs 7th c.BC+]

Strongs

Word:

ἀπό

Transliteration:

apó

Pronounciation:

apo'

Language:

Greek

Definition:

"off," i.e. away (from something near), in various senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative); (X here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th), from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with; a primary particle

Himself

Strongs:

g1438

Greek:

ἑαυτοῦ

Transliteration:

he'autou

Usage:

331 times in 25 books, 152 chapters, and 305 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

my/your/him-self

Morphhology:

Reflexive pronoun 3rd Genitive Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a reference to THEMSELVES: a male person or thing being discussed that something belongs to

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Additional:

himself

Tyndale

Word:

ἑαυτοῦ

Transliteration:

heautou

Gloss:

themself

Morphhology:

Greek Reflexive Pronoun (3rd person)

Definition:

ἑαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ, dative -ῷ, etc, accusative -όν, etc, pi. -ῶν, etc. (Att. contr. αὑτοῦ, etc); reflex pron.; 1) prop, of 3rd person (Lat. sui, sibi, se), of himself, herself, itself, etc: Mat.27:42, Mrk.15:31, Luk.23:35, al; added to a middle verb, διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς, Jhn.19:24; to an active verb, Act.14:14 (M, Pr., 157); ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Luk.12:57 21:30, Jhn.5:19, al. (see: ἀπό); δι᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Rom.14:14; ἐν ἑ, Mat.3:9, Mrk.5:30, al; εἰς ἑ, Luk.15:17; καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Jas.2:17; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, at his own house, 1Co.16:2; πρὸς ἑ, with, to himself, Luk.18:11; as poss. pron. (with emphasis weakened; see M, Pr., 87f.), τ. ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς, Luk.9:60. 2) As reflexive 1st and 2nd of person(s) (so also frequently in cl, chiefly poetry), Mat.23:31, Mrk.9:50, Rom.8:23, 1Th.2:8, al. 3) In pl, for reciprocal pron, ἀλλήλων, -οις, -ους, of one another, etc: Mat.21:38, Mrk.16:3, Eph.5:19, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ἑαυτοῦ

Transliteration:

heautou

Gloss:

themself

Morphhology:

Greek Reflexive Pronoun (3rd person)

Definition:

ἑαυτοῦ, ῆς, οῦ, ἑαυτῷ, ῇ, ῷ, ἑαυτόν, ήν, ό, plural ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτούς άς, ά: Ionic dialect ἑωυτοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ωὑτῆς [Refs 3rd c.BC+] in Papyrus and Inscrr, as [Refs 1st c.BC+]: Attic dialect contraction αὑτοῦ, etc, which is the usual form in Trag, though ἑαυτοῦ, etc, are used (though rarely) when the metre requires, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ϝιαυτοῦ Kohler-Ziebarth Stadtrecht von Gortyn [Refs]; Doric dialect αὐταυτοῦ, αὐσαυτοῦ (which see); Thess. εὑτοῦ (dative), [Refs]: genitive plural ηὑτῶν [Refs]:—reflexive pronoun of 3rd pers., of himself, herself, itself, etc; first in [Refs 7th c.BC+], and Attic dialect [Refs 8th c.BC+] itself by itself, absolutely, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ ἐφ᾽ αὑτοῦ[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτοῦ, of themselves, himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, see at {ἐπ; ἐν ἑαυτῷ γίγνεσθαι}, ἐντὸς ἑαυτοῦ γ, see at {ἐν}, ἐντό; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ at his own house, [Refs]themselves, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλουσιώτεροι ἑαυτῶν continually richer, [Refs 5th c.BC+], compare d; τῇ αὐτὸ ἑωυτοῦ ἐστι μακρότατον at its very greatest length, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) in Attic dialect, Trag, and later, αὑτοῦ, etc, is used for the 1st pers. or 2nd pers., as for ἐμαυτοῦ, αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτοῦ τἄρα μηχανορραφῶ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῖς by ourselves, [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; ἑαυτῶν, ={ὑμῶν αὐτῶν}, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] III) plural, ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτοῖς, etc, is sometimes used for ἀλλήλων, ἀλλήλοις, one another, διάφοροι ἑωυτοῖσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ αὑτοῖν one against the other, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strongs

Word:

ἑαυτοῦ

Transliteration:

heautoû

Pronounciation:

heh-ow-too'

Language:

Greek

Definition:

him- (her-, it-, them-, also (in conjunction with the personal pronoun of the other persons) my-, thy-, our-, your-) self (selves), etc.; alone, her (own, -self), (he) himself, his (own), itself, one (to) another, our (thine) own(-selves), + that she had, their (own, own selves), (of) them(-selves), they, thyself, you, your (own, own conceits, own selves, -selves); from a reflexive pronoun otherwise obsolete and the genitive case (dative case or accusative case) of g846 (αὐτός)

no [thing],

Strongs:

g3762

Lexicon:

οὐδείς

Greek:

οὐδέν,

Transliteration:

ouden

Usage:

235 times in 19 books, 126 chapters, and 223 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

none

Morphhology:

Adjective Accusative Singular Neuter

Grammar:

DESCRIBING a neuter person or thing that is having something done to them

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Additional:

no one

Tyndale

Word:

οὐδείς

Transliteration:

oudeis

Gloss:

none

Morphhology:

Greek Adjective

Definition:

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt, the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al; absol, Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult; with genitive partit, Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al; neut, οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al; id. with genitive partit, Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al; with neg, strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

οὐδείς

Transliteration:

oudeis

Gloss:

none

Morphhology:

Greek Adjective

Definition:

οὐδείς, feminine οὐδεμίᾰ (never nominative accusative -μίη, -μίην, since οὐδεμιῇ is probably in [Refs], rarely οὐδ᾽ ἴα [Refs 7th c.BC+], not one, i.e. no one, none, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+], except in the phrase τὸ ὃν μένος οὐδενὶ εἴκων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδείς is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rare in plural, no set of persons or things, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδένων εἰσὶ βελτίους, i.e. οὔ τινων ἄλλων, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —In _Ionic dialect_ the _plural_ is usually οὐδαμοί. 2) οὐ. ὅστις οὐ every one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐ every, [Refs]; this came to be regarded as one word, so that οὐδείς passed into the same case as ὅστις, οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλασε [Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) later οὐδὲν ὅ τι without οὐ, = nothing, οὐδὲν ὅ τι παρήσω [Refs 4th c.BC+] 4) ὅστις οὐδείς not one, ἐτεθνήκεσαν δὲ αὐτῶν μὲν ἀμφὶ τοὺς τετρακοσίους, Ρωμαίων δὲ ὅστις οὐδείς [Refs] II) naught, good for naught, ὦ νῦν μὲν οὐ. αὔριον δ᾽ ὑπέρμεγας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μὲν [γένος ἀνδρῶν] οὐδέν [Refs 5th c.BC+] knowing naught, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ᾔστην οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν δάκνειν knew nothing save how to, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδὲν λέγειν to say naught, see at {λέγω} (B) III.6; τὸ οὐδ᾽ οὐδέν the absolute nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) in neuter, of persons, οὐδέν εἰμι [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) in plural, οὐδένες ἐόντες ἐν οὐδαμοῖσι ἐοῦσι Ἕλλησι being nobodies, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μηδὲν ὢν κἀξ οὐδένων κεκλήσομαι uncertain conjecture in [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) with Preps, παρ᾽ οὐδὲν εἶναι [Refs]; παρ᾽ οὐδὲν ἄγειν, θέσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.5) τὸ οὐδέν naught, zero, in Arith, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; used by Democritus as a name for Place, [Refs 4th c.BC+] III) neuter οὐδέν as adverb, not at all, naught, ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐ. ἔτισεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in answers, nothing, never mind, no matter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδέν γε not at all, [Refs]; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον, οὐδὲν ἧσσον, οὐδὲν ὕστερος, see at {μάλα} [Refs 4th c.BC+] III.2) οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἤ, see at {ἄλλος} III. 2. B) REMARKS: the more emphatic and literal sense, not even one, i.e. none whatever, belongs to the full form, οὐδὲ εἷς, οὐδὲ μία, οὐδὲ ἕν, which is never elided, even in Comedy texts (see. [Refs 5th c.BC+], but frequently has a Particle inserted between,[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strongs

Word:

οὐδείς

Transliteration:

oudeís

Pronounciation:

oo-den'

Language:

Greek

Definition:

not even one (man, woman or thing), i.e. none, nobody, nothing; any (man), aught, man, neither any (thing), never (man), no (man), none (+ of these things), not (any, at all, -thing), nought; from g3761 (οὐδέ) and g1520 (εἷς)

only

Strongs:

g1437

Lexicon:

ἐάν

Greek:

ἐὰν

Transliteration:

ean

Usage:

362 times in 21 books, 142 chapters, and 329 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

unless

Strongs:

g3361

Greek:

μή

Transliteration:

mē

Usage:

1087 times in 27 books, 240 chapters, and 956 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

not

Morphhology:

Negative Particle Negative Negative

Grammar:

introducing a negative

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

μή

Transliteration:

mē

Gloss:

not

Morphhology:

Greek Particle Neuter

Definition:

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין,אַיִן,אַל] I. As a neg. adv, not; 1) with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. 2) In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. 3) In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. 4) C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f, 239, 255), (a) after verbs of saying, etc: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al; (b) with artic. inf: after a prep, Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al; without a prep, Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; (with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. 5) C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f, 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. 6) μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, (a) with subjc. praes, 1 of person(s) pl: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; (b) with imperat. praes, usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al; (with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor, 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al; with subjc. aor, 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al; (d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl, §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. II. As a conj, 1) after verbs of fearing, caution, etc, that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes, Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor, Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. 2) in order that not: with subjc. aor, Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut, Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al; with subjc. aor, Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

μή

Transliteration:

mē

Gloss:

not

Morphhology:

Greek Particle Neuter

Definition:

μή, Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.) A) in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning, A.1) with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.2) with subjunctive (usually [Refs], in prohibitions, μὴ δή με. ἐάσῃς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μή τοί με κρύψῃς τοῦτο[Refs 5th c.BC+]: coupled with present imperative, μὴ βοηθήσητε τῷ πεπονθότι δεινά, μὴ εὐορκεῖτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] person present subjunctive, μὴ κάμνῃς [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the hortative subjunctive used to supply the [Refs] person of the imperative, present μὴ ἴομεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist μὴ πάθωμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with 1st pers. singular, μή σε. κιχείω [Refs 8th c.BC+] (anapaest meter). A.2.b) with present or aorist subjunctive in a warning or statement of fear, μὴ. γένησθε take care you do not become, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μὴ. ὑφαίνῃσιν I fear. may prove to be weaving, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in Attic dialect Prose, to make a polite suggestion of apprehension or hesitation, perhaps, μὴ ἀγροικότερον ᾖ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in later Greek the indicative is found, μὴ ἡ ἔννοια ἡμῶν. ἀντιλαμβάνεται [Refs 5th c.AD+] A.3) with future indicative, a uncertain usage (νεμεσήσετ᾽ is subjunctive in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μὴ βουλήσεσθε (Papyrus βούλη[σθ]ε) [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.4) with past tenses of indicative to express an unfulfilled wish, μὴ ὄφελες λίσσεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.5) with optative to express a negative wish, with present, ἃ μὴ κραίνοι τύχη [Refs 4th c.BC+]: more frequently with aorist, μὴ σέ γ᾽ ἐν ἀμφιάλῳ Ἰθάκῃ βασιλῆα Κρονίων ποιήσειεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.6) in oaths and asseverations, ἴστω Ζεὺς, μὴ μὲν τοῖς ἵπποισιν ἀνὴρ ἐποχήσεται ἄλλος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.7) with infinitive, when used as imperative, μὴ δή μοι ἀπόπροθεν ἰσχέμεν ἵππους [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.8) frequently without a Verb, εἰ χρή, θανοῦμαι. Answ. μὴ σύ γε (i.e. θάνῃς) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄπελθε νῦν. Answ. μὴ (i.e. γενέσθω) ἀλλά nay but, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in curt expressions, μὴ τριβὰς ἔτι (i.e. ποιεῖσθε) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μή μοι σύ none of that to me! [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μή μοι πρόφασιν no excuses! [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) in DEPENDENT clauses: B.1) with Final Conjs, ἵνα μή [Refs 8th c.BC+], that so, ὅπως ἂν. μηδέ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but B.1.b) μή alone, ={ἵνα μή}, lest, ἀπόστιχε μή τινοήσῃ Ἥρη [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future indicative and aorist subjunctive in consecutive clauses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) in the protasis of conditional sentences, see at {εἰ} (for the exceptions see at {οὐ}), and with temporal conjunctions used conditionally, see at {ἐπειδάν, ὅταν, ὅτε}, etc. B.2.b) ὅτι μή except, ὅτι μὴ Χῖοι μοῦνοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅσα μὴ ἀποβαίνοντες provided only that they did not disembark, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.3) in later Gr, with causal Conjs, ὁ μὴ πιστεύων ἤδη κέκριται, ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν [NT+2nd c.AD+] that, ὅτι μὴ ἐστὶν ἐπίπεδος οὕτως ἂν καταμάθοιμεν [Refs 2nd c.AD+] B.4) in relative clauses, which imply a condition or generality, ὃς δὲ μὴ εἶδέ κω τὴν κανναβίδα whoever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὃ μὴ κελεύσει (perhaps κελεύσαι) Ζεύς such a thing as, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; λέγονθ᾽ ἃ μὴ δεῖ such things as one ought not, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with subjunctive, ᾧ μὴ ἄλλοι ἀοσσητῆρες ἔωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.5) with infinitive, B.5.a) regularlyfrom Homer on, except after Verbs of saying and thinking (but see below c): after ὥστε or ὡς, ὥστε μὴ φρονεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+]: always when the infinitive takes the Article, τὸ μὴ προμαθεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5.b) by an apparent pleonasm after Verbs of negative result signifying to forbid, deny, and the like, ὁ δ᾽ ἀναίνετο μηδὲν ἑλέσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] (μηδέν); ἀντιλέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ); ἀπαγορεύειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ); ἀποτρέπεσθαι [Refs] (μηδέν); ἀρνεῖσθαι, ἔξαρνος εἶναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παύειν (where the participle is more frequently) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in these cases the Article frequently precedes μή, τὸ δὲ μὴ λεηλατῆσαι. ἔσχε τόδε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐξομῇ τὸ μὴ εἰδένα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴργειν τὸ μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐμποδὼν γίγνεσθαι τοῦ μή. [Refs] B.5.c) after Verbs of saying and thinking which involve an action of will, as in those signifying to swear, aver, believe, and the like; so after ὄμνυμι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: occasionally with other Verbs, φημί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λέγω, προλέγω, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντες ἐροῦσι μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νομίζω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: very frequently in later Gr, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) with the participle, when it can be resolved into a conditional clause, μὴ ἐνείκας, = {εἰ μὴ ἤνεικε}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μὴ θέλων, ={εἰ μὴ θέλεις}, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; μὴ δολώσαντος θεοῦ, ={εἰ μὴ ἐδόλωσε}, [Refs]; μὴ δρῶν, ={εἰ μὴ δρῴην}, [Refs 5th c.BC+], = ut qui nihil sciam, [Refs]; τίς πρὸς ἀνδρὸς μὴ βλέποντος ἄρκεσι; one who sees not, [Refs]: in this signification frequently with the Article, ὁ μὴ λεύσσων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with causal significance, μὴ παρὼν θαυμάζεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]: very frequently in later Greek, [Refs 1st c.AD+]: occasionally after Verbs of knowing and showing, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) with Substantives, adjectives, and adverbs used generically, with or without Article, τὰ μὴ δίκαια [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ μὴ 'μπειρία, ={τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ἐμπειρίαν}, want of experience, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δῆμον καὶ μὴ δῆμον[Refs 4th c.BC+] B.8) after Verbs expressing fear or apprehension (compare μὴ οὐ): B.8.a) when the thing feared is future, mostly with subjunctive: with present subjunctive, δεινῶς ἀθυμῶ μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ shall proveto be, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: more frequently with aorist, δείδοικα. μή σε παρείπῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with perfect, shall prove to have been, δέδοικα μὴ περαιτέρω πεπραγμέν᾽ ᾖ μοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: less frequently with future indicative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with optative according to the sequence of moods and tenses: present optative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with future optative in oratio obliqua, [Refs 5th c.BC+]vect.4.41. B.8.b) when the action is present or past, the indicative is used, εἰσόρα μὴ σκῆψιν οὐκ οὖσαν τίθης [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8.c) with indicative and subjunctive in consecutive clauses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) in QUESTIONS: C.I) direct questions, C.I.1) with indicative, where aneg. answer is anticipated (but more generally in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μή σοι δοκοῦμεν; [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ) follows οὐ, see at {οὐ μή}. C.I.1.b) in other questions, τί μὴ ποιήσ; what am I not to do? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί μ; why not? [Refs]; compare μήν C.I.2) with subjunctive, when the speaker deliberates about a negative action, μὴ οὕτω φῶμε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοιοῦτος μὴ δῷ δίκη; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πῶς μὴ φῶμε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; how can a man help being excited when he speaks? [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II) indirect questions, frequently with Verbs implying fear and apprehension [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also σκοπεῖσθαι πῶς ἂν μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later in simple indirect questions, ἐπυνθάνετο μὴ ἔγνω [Refs 2nd c.AD+] C.II.2) in questions introduced by εἰ, ἤρετό με. εἰ μὴ μέμνημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴτε. εἴτε μή, εἰ. ἢ οὔ, εἰ. ἢ μή without difference of meaning between μή and οὐ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) POSITION of μή. When the negative extends its power over the whole clause, μή properly precedes the Verb. When its force is limited to single words, it precedes those words. But Poets sometimes put μή after the Verb, ὄλοιο μή πω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φράσῃς. μὴ πέρα[Refs] D.2) μή is sometimes repeated, μή, μή καλέσῃς [Refs 5th c.BC+] E) PROSODY: in Trag. μή may be joined by synizesis with a following ει or ου, μὴ οὐ, μὴ εἰδέναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: initial ε after μή is cut off by aphaeresis, μὴ 'πὁθουν [Refs] followed by α is sometimes written μἀ. (see. μὴ ἀλλά, etc.); sometimes separately, μὴ ἀδικεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+] F) μή in COMPOSITION (joined with other words), as μὴ ἀλλά, μὴ γάρ, μὴ οὐ, μὴ ὅπως or ὅτι, μή ποτε, etc, will be found in alphabetical order.

Strongs

Word:

μή

Transliteration:

mḗ

Pronounciation:

may

Language:

Greek

Definition:

(adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas g3756 (οὐ) expects an affirmative one)) whether; any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, + lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not, nothing, that not, un(-taken), without; a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas g3756 (οὐ) expresses an absolute denial)

anything

Strongs:

g5100

Lexicon:

τις

Greek:

τι

Transliteration:

ti

Usage:

544 times in 27 books, 181 chapters, and 501 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

one

Morphhology:

Indefinite pronoun Accusative Singular Neuter

Grammar:

a generalising reference to a neuter person or thing that is having something done to them

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

τις

Transliteration:

tis

Gloss:

one

Morphhology:

Greek Indefinite Pronoun

Definition:

τις, neut, τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. I. As subst, 1) one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al; pl, τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. 2) someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al; = indef, one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al; pl, τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. II. II. As adj, 1) a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al; with genitive partit, Luk.7:19, al. 2) some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

τις

Transliteration:

tis

Gloss:

one

Morphhology:

Greek Indefinite Pronoun

Definition:

τις, τι, Indef. pronoun any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions see below):—but τί; τί; Interrog. pronoun who? what?, oxytone in the monosyllable cases, paroxytone in the others:—Dialectal forms: [Refs 5th c.AD+] σις (si se) [Refs 4th c.AD+] σις (with? for σ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Thess. κις [Refs], neuter κι in διεκί, ποκκί (which see); neuter plural Doric dialect σά, Boeotian dialect τά, Aeolic dialect dative τίω, τίοισι (see. infr. B). (I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] q[uglide]i-, cf. Latin quis, quid, etc; for σά, τά, see at {ἄσσα}, σά μά; with τέο (see. infr. B) cf. OSlav. genitive česo) A) Indef. pronoun τις, τι, genitive Ionic dialect τεο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect του [Refs 5th c.BC+]; του is rare after [NT+4th c.BC+], but found in [Refs 3rd c.BC+], revived by the Atticists, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; τινος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; dative Ionic dialect τεῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect τῳ (also in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τινι [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the form οὔ τινι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative τινα [Refs 8th c.BC+], neuter τι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: plural τινες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τινεν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; nominative and accusative neuter τινα (ὅτινα [Refs 8th c.BC+], never in Trag, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄσσα (which see) [Refs 8th c.BC+], never in Trag. or [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect ἄττα first in [LXX+5th c.BC+], revived by the Atticists, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; genitive Ionic dialect τεων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τινων not in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; dative τισι, τισιν, first in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; N.-W. Doric dialect τινοις [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect τεοισι [Refs 5th c.BC+] (for τεοις and τεον see at {τεός}); accusative τινας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; neuter τινα (see. above):—any one, any thing, some one, some thing; and as adjective any, some, and serving as the Indef. Article a, an; θεός νύ τίς ἐστι κοτήεις [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II) special usages: A.II.1) some one (of many), i.e. many a one, ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: sometimes with meiosis, implying all or men,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) any one concerned, every one, εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλά τις αὐτὸς ἴτω let every man come himself,[Refs]; so in Trag. and Attic dialect, even with the imperative, τοῦτό τις. ἴστω S [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς ξυμμάχους αὐτόν τινα κολάζειν that every man should himself chastise his own allies, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄμεινόν τινος better than any others, [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—this is more fully expressed by adding other pronominal words, τις ἕκαστος [Refs 8th c.BC+]. In these senses, τις is frequently combined with plural words, οἱ κακοὶ. οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ, for πρὶν ἐκβάλωσι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἷς ἂν ἐπίω, ἧσσόν τις πρόσεισι, for ἧσσον προσίασι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially after εἴ or ἤν τις, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) in reference to a definite person, whom one wishes to avoid naming, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ (i.e. Cyrus) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so also euphemistic for something bad, ἤν τι ποιῶμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: hence for the 1st pers. or 2nd pers. pronoun, ἅ τιν᾽ οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ποῖ τις τρέψετα; for ποῖ τρέψομα; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) indefinitely, where we say they, French on, sometimes with an ironical force, φοβεῖταί τις [Refs 4th c.BC+]; as vocative, τὸν Πλοῦτον ἔξω τις κάλει call P. out, somebody, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.5) τις, τι may be opposed, expressly or by implication, to οὐδείς, οὐδέν, and mean somebody, something, by meiosis for some great one, some great thing, ηὔχεις τις εἶναι you boasted that you were somebody, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἠγών τις φαίνομαι ἦμεν after all I too am somebody, [NT+3rd c.BC+]; also in neuter, οἴονταί τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.5.b) τις is sometimes opposed to to another word, ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν᾽ εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαί, τέρπεται δὲ καί τις. [LXX+5th c.BC+]; ἔστιν οὖν οὐ πᾶν τὸ ταχύ, ἀλλά τι (sic codices BT) αὐτοῦ ἀγαστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μεῖζον τοῦθ᾽ ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἑτέρου λέγεται· τινὸς γὰρ λέγεται μεῖζον greater than something, [Refs]; πότερον τῷ τυχόντι ἢ τισί; [Refs] A.II.6) with (Proper name)s τις commonly signifies one named so-and-so, ἦν δέ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι Δάρης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with a sense of contempt, Θερσίτης τις ἦν there was one Thersites, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.6.b) one of the same sort, converting the (Proper name) into an appellative, ἤ τις Ἀπόλλων ἢ Πάν an Apollo or a Pan, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; [πόλιες] ταὶ μέλονται πρός τινος ἢ Διὸς ἢ γλαυκᾶς Ἀθάνας Lyric poetry in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἰσθμόν τιν᾽ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.7) with adjectives τις combines to express the idea of a substantive used as predicate, ὥς τις θαρσαλέος καὶ ἀναιδής ἐσσι προΐκτης a bold and impudent beggar, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐγώ τις, ὡς ἔοικε, δυσμαθής a dullard, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φόβου πλέα τις εἶ a coward, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὡς ταχεῖά τις. χάρις διαρρεῖ in what swift fashion (={ταχέως πως}), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δεινόν τι ποιεύμενος thinking it a terrible thing, [Refs] A.II.8) with numerals and adjectives expressing number, size, or the like, εἷς δέ τις ἀρχὸς ἀνὴρ. ἔστω some one man, [NT+8th c.BC+]; sometimes the τις softens the definiteness of the numeral, ἑπτά τινες some seven, seven or so, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so without an actual numeral, ἡμέρας τινάς some days, i.e. several, [Refs]; στρατῷ τινι of a certain amount, considerable, [Refs]; ἐνιαυτόν τινα a year or so, [Refs]; so οὐ πολλοί τινες, τινὲς οὐ πολλοί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀλίγοι τινές or τινὲς ὀλίγοι [Refs]; οὔ τινα πολλὸν χρόνον no very long time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so also ὅσσος τις χρυσός what a store of gold, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.9) with Pronominal words, ἀλλά τί μοι τόδε θυμὸς. μερμηρίζει something, namely this, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷός τις what sort of a man, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.10) with the Article, A.II.10.a) when a noun with the Article is in apposition with τις, as ὅταν δ᾽ ὁ κύριος παρῇ τις when the person in authority, whoever he be, is here, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς αὐτοέντας. τιμωρεῖν τινας (variant τινα) [Refs] A.II.10.b) in Philosophic writers, τις is added to the Article to show that the Article is used to denote a particular individual who is not specified in the general formula, although he would be in the particular case, ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος the individual man (whoever he may be), this or that man, opposed to ἄνθρωπος (man in general), ὁ τὶς ἵππος, ἡ τὶς γραμματική, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὸ τὶ μέγεθος, opposed to ὅλως τὸ μέγεθος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], the Article is used as in [Refs 8th c.BC+] cc. (which see) ὁ, ἡ, τό [Refs 5th c.BC+], δεῦρο ὅ τις θεός, ὄφθητί μοι in a general formula of invocation, [Refs] A.II.10.c) frequently in opposed clauses, ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δὲ. [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc: also combined with other alternative words, ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις, ἕτερος δέ τις. [Refs]; ὁ μὲν, ἕτερος δέ τις, ὁ δὲ, etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in neuter, τὸ μέν τι, τὸ δέ τι. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in adverbial sense, τὸ μὲν, τὸ δέ τι. partly, partly. , [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; and τι remains unaltered even when the Article is plural, τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ τι. but in some measure, without τὸ μέν preceding, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.10.d) later τις is used as in b above but without the Article, γράψον. ὅτι τι καί τι εἴληφας that you have received such and such things, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τίς τινι χαίρειν [Refs 2nd c.AD+] A.II) the neuter τι is used, A.II.a) collectively, ἦν τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις there was a party. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so perhaps τῶν ἄλλων οὔ πέρ τι πεφυγμένον ἐστ᾽ Ἀφροδίτην, οὔτε θεῶν, οὔτ᾽ ἀνθρώπων no class, [Refs] (but masculine τις in [Refs] A.II.b) euphemistic for something bad, see above [Refs] A.II.c) joined with Verbs, somewhat, in any degree, at all, ἦ ῥά τί μοι κεχολώσεαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ πάνυ τι, πολύ τι, σχεδόν τι, see at {πάνυ} [Refs]; also in conjunction with οὐδέν, μηδέν, οὐδέν τι πάντως [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδέν, μηδέν τι μᾶλλον, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —also καί τι καὶ. ὑποψίᾳ in part also from suspicion, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.12) τίς τε frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.13) ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς few or none, next to none, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἤ τι ἢ οὐδέν little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.14) τις is pleonastic in such phrases as οὐδέν τι or μηδέν τι, see above [Refs] A.II.14.b) repeated in successive clauses, ὅσα λέγει τις ἢ πράσσειτις ἢψέγειν ἔχει [Refs 5th c.BC+] (whereas τις is sometimes omitted in the first clause, οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+], the repetition is pleonastic, as also in [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.II.15) τις is sometimes omitted, οὐδέ κεν ἔνθα τεόν γε μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο (i.e. τις) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὡς δ᾽ ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται (i.e. τις) φεύγοντα διώκειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: τις must often be supplied from what goes before,[Refs] A.II.15.b) sometimes also τις is omitted before a genitive case which must depend upon it, as ἢ [τις] τᾶς ἀσώτου Σισυφιδᾶν γενεᾶς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἢν γαμῇ ποτ᾽ αὐτὸς ἢ [τις] τῶν ξυγγενῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) Accentuation and position of τις: A.III.1) accentuation: τις is normally enclitic, but in certain uses is orthotone, i.e. theoretically oxytone (τίς, τινά, τινές, τινῶν, etc,[Refs 4th c.AD+] or τις, τινὰ, τινὲς, τινῶν, etc.). According to [Refs] A.III.1.a) at the beginning of a sentence, τίς ἔνδον; is any one within? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τί φημ; ={λέγω τι}; am I saying anything? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; <τίς ἦλθ;> ἦλθέ τις has anybody come? [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; τὶς κάθηται, τὶς περιπατεῖ, so and so is sitting (walking), [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὶς αἰπόλος καλούμενος Κομάτας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι οὖν (τὶς ἂν εἴποι) ταῦτα λέγει; [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.III.1.b) when τις is opposed to to another τις or to some other word, τισὶ μὲν συμφέρει, τισὶ δ᾽ οὐ συμφέρει [Refs 5th c.BC+] for a certain person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. Codices are not consistent; in signification[Refs] they make it enclitic; in signification [Refs]; sometimes enclitic and orthotone in the same sentence, πάντα δὲ τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπό τέ τινος γίγνεται καὶ ἔκ τινος καὶ τί [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) position: A.III.2.a) τις is rarely first word in the sentence, and rarely follows a pause (see. above [Refs]; it may stand second word, ἔσκε τις ἐνθάδε μάντις ἀνήρ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but in general its position is not far before or after the word to which it belongs in sense, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε δή τινα μάντιν ἐρείομεν [Refs] A.III.2.b) in Ionic dialect Prose it sometimes stands between its genitive and the Article of that genitive, τῶν τις Περσέων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so also in late Prose, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] A.III.2.c) it stands between the Article and substantive in signification[Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2.d) τίς τι is the correct order, not τί τις, “IG” 12.110.46, 5th c.BC: Thucydides Historicus 7.10, 5th-6th c.BC: Xenophon Historicus “Anabasis” 4.1.14 (codices dett.), 4th c.BC: Demosthenes Orator 22.22, etc. A.III.2.e) whereas in _Attic dialect_ the order ἐάν τις is compulsory, in _Doric dialect_ the usual order is αἴ τίς κα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: later Doric dialect εἴ τί κα [Refs]; καἴ τι ἂν (={καὶ εἴ τι ἂν}) [Refs 1st c.BC+], see below [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—this Doric dialect order influenced the Koine, as in the rare εἴ τις ἂν [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strongs

Word:

τὶς

Transliteration:

tìs

Pronounciation:

tis

Language:

Greek

Definition:

some or any person or object; a (kind of), any (man, thing, thing at all), certain (thing), divers, he (every) man, one (X thing), ought, + partly, some (man, -body, - thing, -what), (+ that no-)thing, what(-soever), X wherewith, whom(-soever), whose(-soever); an enclitic indefinite pronoun

He shall see

Strongs:

g991

Lexicon:

βλέπω

Greek:

βλέπῃ

Transliteration:

blepē

Usage:

136 times in 16 books, 76 chapters, and 121 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

to see

Morphhology:

Verb Present Active Subjunctive 3rd Singular

Grammar:

an ACTION that maybe happens - by a person or thing being discussed

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

βλέπω

Transliteration:

blepō

Gloss:

to see

Morphhology:

Greek Verb

Definition:

βλέπω, [in LXX chiefly for ראה, also for פּנה, etc;] 1) of bodily sight; (a) to see, have sight (opposite to τυφλὸς): Mat.12:22, Jhn.9:7, Act.9:9, Rom.11:8, Rev.3:18, al; (b) to perceive, look (at), see: absol, Act.1:9; with accusative, Mat.7:3, Mrk.5:31, Luk.6:41, Jhn.1:29, al; ὅραμα, Act.12:9; γυναῖκα, Mat.5:28; βιβλίον, Rev.5:3, 4; τ. βλεπόμενα, 2Co.4:18. 2) Metaphorical, of mental vision; (a) to see, perceive, discern: absol, Mat.13:13, Luk.8:10; δι ̓ ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; with accusative, Heb.2:9 10:25; before ὅτι, Heb.3:19, Jas.2:22; (b) to consider, look to, take heed: absol, Mrk.13:23, 33; with accusative, 1Co.1:26, al; before πῶς, with indic, Luk.8:18, 1Co.3:10, Eph.5:15; before τί, with indic, Mrk.4:24; before εἰς πρόσωπον, of partiality, Mat.22:16, Mrk.12:14. Colloq. (for ex. from π, V. Deiss, LAE, 122; M, Pr., 107; MM, Exp., x; Milligan, NTD, 50), β. ἑαυτόν: Mrk.13:9; before ἵνα μή, II Jo 8; β. ἀπό, Mrk.8:15 12:38; before μή (cl. ὁρᾶν), with fut. indic, Col.2:8, Heb.3:12; id. with aor. subj, Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5. 3) Of situation and direction (Lat. specto), to look, face (towards), places, etc. (before πρός, Xen, Hell., vii, 1, 17; Eze.40:23, 24): before κατά, with accusative, Act.27:12 (cf. ἀνα, ἀπο, δια, ἐμ, ἐπι, περ, προ-βλέπω), see DCG, i, 446; ii, 596. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

βλέπω

Transliteration:

blepō

Gloss:

to see

Morphhology:

Greek Verb

Definition:

βλέπω, [Refs 6th c.BC+]: imperfect ἔβλεπον [Refs]: future βλέψομαι [Refs 4th c.BC+], Doric dialect infinitive βλεψεῖσθαι [LXX+2nd c.AD+]aorist ἔβλεψα (see. below): perfect βέβλεφα (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.AD+]; βέβλοφα (ἐμ-) [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —passive, aorist ἐβλέφθην (προσ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]perfect βέβλεμμαι to be supplied in [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —chiefly in present and aorist active in early writers: middle (except future) and passive only late:—see, have the power of sight (distinct from ὁρῶ perceive, be aware of,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ lest he see too clearly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ βλέπων the seer, Hebraism in [LXX]; ὀλίγον βλέπων short- sighted, [Refs 1st c.AD+] II) look, βλέφ᾽ ὧδε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πῶς βλέπων; with what face? [Refs 5th c.BC+] adverb, φιλοφρόνως, ἐχθρῶς β. πρός τινας[Refs 5th c.BC+] look terror, i. e. to look terrible, Θυιὰς ὣς φόβον βλέπων [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Comedy texts, ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ looked mustard, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πυρρίχην βλέπων looking like a war-dancer, [Refs]; αἴκειαν βλέπων looking like one disgraced, [Refs]; σκύτη β, of a slave, [Refs 5th c.BC+] adjective, μέγα β.[Refs 7th c.BC+]: by infinitive, ἁρπάζειν β. [Refs 4th c.BC+]: by participle neuter, τί πεφροντικὸς βλέπεις ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) β. ἐς look to, rely on, εἰς ἔργον οὐδὲν γιγνόμενον βλέπετε [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἔς σε δὴ βλέπω, ὅπως. in the hope that, [Refs]: metaphorically also, have regard to, ἡ πολιτεία β. εἰς πλοῦτον [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of aspects, οἰκίαι πρὸς μεσημβρίαν βλέπουσαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) look longingly, expect, propose, with infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) look to a thing, beware, ἀπό τινος [NT]; τι [NT+1st c.AD+]; β. ἵνα. [NT]; β. ἑαυτοὺς ἵνα μὴ. [NT] III) transitive, see, behold, with accusative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐξ αὑτοῦ βλεπόμενον self-evident, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὰ βλεπόμενα the visible universe, [LXX] III.2) ζῇ τε καὶ β. φάος sees the light of day, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βλέποντα νῦν μὲν ὄρθ᾽ ἔπειτα δὲ σκότον (i. e. being blind) [Refs 5th c.BC+], to be alive, ζῶντα καὶ βλέποντα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of things, ἀληθῆ καὶ βλέποντα actually existing, [Refs 4th c.BC+] III.3) look for, μεῖζόν τι β. [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.4) Astrology texts of signs equidistant from the tropical points, to be in aspect, β. ἄλληλα [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Strongs

Word:

βλέπω

Transliteration:

blépō

Pronounciation:

blep'-o

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Verb

Definition:

to look at (literally or figuratively); behold, beware, lie, look (on, to), perceive, regard, see, sight, take heed; a primary verb

the

Strongs:

g3588

Lexicon:

ὁ

Greek:

τὸν

Transliteration:

ton

Usage:

20754 times in 27 books, 260 chapters, and 7041 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Definite article Accusative Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a SPECIFIC male person or thing that is having something done to them

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strongs

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Pronounciation:

to

Language:

Greek

Definition:

the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article

Father

Strongs:

g3962

Lexicon:

πατήρ

Greek:

πατέρα

Transliteration:

patera

Usage:

422 times in 26 books, 141 chapters, and 373 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

father

Morphhology:

Noun Accusative Singular Masculine Title

Grammar:

a proper name of a male PERSON OR THING that is having something done to them

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

πατήρ

Transliteration:

patēr

Gloss:

father

Morphhology:

Greek Noun Male

Definition:

πατήρ, πατρός, -τρί, τέρα, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for אָב;] a father; 1) prop, (a) of the male parent: Mat.2:22, Luk.1:17, Jhn.4:53; anarth, Heb.12:7 (M, Pr., 82 f.); pl, of both parents (cl.), Heb.11:23; οἱ π. τ. σαρκός, Heb.12:9; (b) of a forefather or ancestor (in cl. usually in pl; Hom, al.): Mat.3:9, Luk.1:73, Jhn.8:39, al; pl, Mat.23:30, 32 Luk.6:23, 26 Jhn.4:20, 1Co.10:1, al. 2) Metaphorical, (a) of an author, originator, or archetype (= αἴτιος, ἀρχηγός, etc; Pind, Plat, al.): Jhn.8:41-44, Rom.4:11, 12 16. (b) as a title of respect or honour, used of seniors, teachers and others in a position of responsible authority (Jdg.17:10, 2Ki.2:12, Pro.1:8, al.): Mat.23:9 Act.7:2 22:1, 1Jn.2:13. 3) Of God (as in cl. of Zeus) as Father; (a) of created things: τ. φώτων, Jas.1:17; (b) of all sentient beings: Eph.3:14, 15 Heb.12:9; (with) of men, esp. those in covenant relation with Him (freq in OT and later Jewish lit; see Dalman, Words, 184ff.): Mat.6:4, Luk.6:36, Jhn.4:21, Jas.3:9, al; ὁ π. ὁ ἐν (τ.) οὐρανοῖς, Mat.5:16, Mrk.11:25; ὁ π. ὁ οὐράνιος, Mat.6:14 15:13; esp. in the Epp, of Christians: Rom.8:15, 2Co.6:18, Gal.4:6, Eph.2:18 4:6, 1Jn.2:1; with genitive qual, τ. οἰκτιρμῶν, 2Co.1:3; τ. δοξῆς, Eph.1:17; (d) of Christ (Dalman, Words, 190 ff.); (α) by our Lord himself: ὁ π, Mat.11:25-27, Luk.10:2, 22 Jhn.5:20-23, al; ὁ π. μου, Mat.11:27, al; ὁ ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς, Mat.7:11, al; ὁ οὐράνιος, Mat.15:13; vocat, Jhn.11:41 12:27, 28 17:1, 5, 11, 20, 25 (cf. Abbott, JG, 96 f.); (β) by Apostles: Jhn.1:14 (anarth; see M, Pr., l.with), Rom.15:6, 2Co.1:3 11:31, Eph.1:3, Col.1:3, Heb.1:5, 1Pe.1:3, Rev.1:6 (cf. Westc, Epp. Jo., 27-34). (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

πατήρ

Transliteration:

patēr

Gloss:

father

Morphhology:

Greek Noun Male

Definition:

πᾰτήρ, ὁ, genitive and dative πατέρος, πατέρι in Epic dialect and Lyric poetry, Attic dialect πατρός, πατρί (which is also the commoner form in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative always πατέρ; vocative πάτερ: plural πατέρες, πατέρας, πατέρων (πατρῶν only [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative πατράσι [ᾰ] (cf. Sanskrit locative plural pitṛ[snull]u, no dative plural occurs in [Refs 8th c.BC+], late Epic dialect πατέρεσσι [Refs 4th c.AD+]:— father, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πατρὸς πατήρ grandfather,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ πρὸς πατρός by the father's side, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; especially of God, the father of the Israelites, [LXX]; father of men, [NT]; father of Jesus Christ, [Refs] II) especially as epithet of Zeus, πατὴρ Ζεύς, π. Κρονίδης, π. ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ζεὺς π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. Οὐρανιδᾶν Ζ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) respectful mode of addressing persons older than oneself, ξεὶνε πάτερ [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc; in addressing an elder brother, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] IV) metaphorically, father, author, ἀοιδᾶν π. εὐαίνητος Ὀρφεύς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Χρόνος ὁ πάντων π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῦ λόγου π. [Refs]; ὁ π. τῶν φώτων, i.e. God, the father of the stars, [NT]; οἱ π. τῶν ἀτόμων the authors of the atomic theory, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of capital, τοῦ πατρὸς ἐκγόνους τόκους [Refs 5th c.BC+] V) title of a grade in the mysteries of Mithras, [Refs] VI) π. πατρίδος, = Latin pater patriae, [Refs 1st c.AD+] VII) in plural, VII.1) forefathers, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐξέτι πατρῶν from our fathers' time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] VII.2) parents, [Refs 1st c.BC+] VII.3) parentnation, opposed to colonists, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskritpitár, Latin pater, etc.)

Strongs

Word:

πατήρ

Transliteration:

patḗr

Pronounciation:

pat-ayr'

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Noun Masculine

Definition:

a "father" (literally or figuratively, near or more remote); father, parent; apparently a primary word

doing.

Strongs:

g4160G

Strongs extended:

g4160, g4160G, g4160H, g4160I, g4160J

Lexicon:

ποιέω

Greek:

ποιοῦντα.

Transliteration:

poiounta

Usage:

566 times in 26 books, 186 chapters, and 509 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

whatever

Strongs:

g3739

Lexicon:

ὅς, ἥ

Greek:

ἃ

Transliteration:

ha

Usage:

1437 times in 27 books, 248 chapters, and 1239 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

which

Morphhology:

Relative pronoun Accusative Plural Neuter

Grammar:

a REFERENCE BACK to neuter people or things that are having something done to them

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ὅς

Transliteration:

hos, hē

Gloss:

which

Morphhology:

Greek Relative Pronoun

Definition:

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν. ὃς δέ, the one. the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut, ὃ μὲν. ὃ δέ, the one. the other, some. some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν. (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)). ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol, 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν. ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. II. As relat. pron, who, which, what, that; 1) agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. 2) In variation from the common construction; (a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al; (b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; (with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl, §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. 3) The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. 4) With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. 5) Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. 6) C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν (= ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. 7) With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. 8) Gen, οὗ, absol, as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ὅς

Transliteration:

hos, hē

Gloss:

which

Morphhology:

Greek Relative Pronoun

Definition:

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used, A ) as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases. B ) as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she, it).) A) DEMONSTR. PRON, ={οὗτος},{ὅδε}, this, that; also, he, she, it: A.I) Homeric usage: this form only occurs in the nominative masculine and neuter ὅς, ὅ, and perhaps nominative feminine ἥ and nominative plural οἵ, the other cases being supplied by ὁ, ἡ, τό (ὅ, ἡ, τό); most codices have ἥ in [Refs 8th c.BC+] before it, μηδ᾽ ὅν τινα γαστέρι μήτηρ κοῦρον ἐόντα φέροι, μηδ᾽ ὃς φύγοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]participle, εἰς ἕτερον γάρ τίς τε ἰδών, ὃς σπεύδει (for ὅστις ἂν ἴδῃ, ὃς σπεύδει) [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II) in later Gr. this usage remained in a few forms: A.II.1) at the beginning of a clause, καὶ ὅς and he, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καὶ ἥ and she, καὶ οἵ and they, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) ὃς καὶ ὅς such and such a person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —here also the _Article_ supplied the oblative cases. A.II.3) ἦ δ᾽ ὅς, ἦ δ᾽ ἥ, said he, said she, see at {ἠμί}. A.II.4) in oppositions, where it sometimes answers to the Article, Λέριοι κακοί· οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ᾽ οὔ. [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ὃ μὲν, ὃ δὲ, ὃ δὲ. (neuter) [NT+4th c.BC+]: so in Doric dialect dative feminine as adverb, ᾇ μὲν, ᾇ δὲ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]: very frequently in late Prose, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: also answering to other Prons, ἑτέρων, ὧν δὲ. [Refs 4th c.BC+] B) RELAT. PRON, who, which.—By the side of the simple Relat, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A0) USAGE of the Relat. pronoun (the following remarks apply to ὅς γε, ὅσπερ, ὅστε, ὅστις, as well as to ὅς, and to ὁ, ἡ, τό as relative): A0.I) in respect of CONCOR[Refs 4th c.BC+] —Prop. it agrees in gender and number with the Noun or _pronoun_ in the antecedent clause.—But this rule admits of many exceptions: A0.I.1) the Relat. mayagree with the gender implied, not expressed, in the antecedent, φίλον θάλος, ὃν τέκον αὐτή [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so after collective Nouns, the Relat. is frequently put in plural in the gender implied in the Noun, λαόν, οὕς. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στρατιάν. τοιαύτην, οἵ τινες, τὸ ναυτικόν, οἵ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially after the names of countries or cities, Τηλέπυλον Λαιστρυγονίην ἀφίκανεν, οἳ. (i. e. to Telepylos of the Laestrygonians, who. ) [Refs 8th c.BC+] adjective, Θηβαίας ἐπισκοποῦντ᾽ ἀγυιάς, τάν. the streets of Thebes, which, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς Ἡρακλείους παῖδας, ὃς. the children of Heracles, who, [Refs 5th c.BC+]of me whom, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμισύν ἐστ᾽ ἀτελὴς τοῦ χρόνου· εἶθ᾽ ἧς πᾶσι μέτεστι, where ἧς agrees with ἀτελείας implied in ἀτελής, [Refs 4th c.BC+] A0.I.2) when the antec. Noun in singular implies a class, the Relat. is sometimes in plural, ἦ μάλα τις θεὸς ἔνδον, οἳ. ἔχουσιν (for τις θεῶν, οἵ.) in some places, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὗ μέν, οὗ δέ. in some places, in others, [Refs 4th c.BC+] in what part of the earth, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A0.I.2) in pregnant phrases, μικρὸν προϊόντες,οὗ ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο (for ἐκεῖσε οὗ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπιὼν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, οὗ κατέφυγε (for οἷ κατέφυγε καὶ οὗ ἦν) [NT+5th c.BC+]: but in early writers this is falsa lectio, as in [Refs 4th c.BC+] A0.II) dative feminine ᾗ, Doric dialect ᾇ, of Place, where, or Manner, as, see at {ᾗ}. A0.III) old locative οἷ, as adverb, see at {οἷ}. A0.III.2) old ablative ὧ, in Doric dialect (compare ϝοίκω), τηνῶθε καθεῖλον, ὧ (whence) μ᾽ ἐκέλευ καθελεῖν τυ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A0.IV) accusative singular neuter ὅ, very frequently ={ὅτι}, that, how that, λεύσσετε γὰρ τό γε πάντες ὅ μοι γέρας ἔρχεται ἄλλῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and so also, because, ταρβήσας ὅ οἱ ἄγχι πάγη βέλος [Refs] A0.IV.2) in Attic dialect ὅ, for which reason, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A0.IV.3) whereas, [NT+5th c.BC+] A0.V) ἀφ᾽ οὗπερ from the time that, [Refs 4th c.BC+] A0.VI) ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, see at {ἐπί} [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strongs

Word:

ὅς

Transliteration:

hós

Pronounciation:

ho

Language:

Greek

Definition:

the relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what, that; one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se), etc; probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article g3588 (ὁ))

for

Strongs:

g1063

Lexicon:

γάρ

Greek:

γὰρ

Transliteration:

gar

Usage:

1085 times in 27 books, 227 chapters, and 1029 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Morphhology:

Conjunction

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

γάρ

Transliteration:

gar

Gloss:

for

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl; 1) explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3 o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. 2) Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic, in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. 3) Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl, §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

γάρ

Transliteration:

gar

Gloss:

for

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

γάρ (γε, ἄρα), causal conjunction, used alone or with other Particles. I) introducing the reason or cause of what precedes, for, τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε θεὰ λευκώλενος Ἥρη· κήδετο γ. Δαναῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but frequently in explanation of that which is implied in the preceding clause, πολλάων πολίων κατέλυσε κάρηνα. τοῦ γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον [Refs] I.b) in simple explanations, especially after a Pronoun or demonstrative adjective, ἀλλὰ τόδ᾽ αἰνὸν ἄχος κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἱκάνει· Ἕκτωρ γ. ποτε φήσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ δὲ δεινότατον. ὁ Ζεὺς γ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in introducing proofs or examples, μαρτύριον δέ· Δήλου γ. καθαιρομένης. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τεκμήριον δέ· οὔτε γ. Λακεδαιμόνιοι. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in full, τεκμήριον δὲ τούτου τόδε· αἱ μὲν γ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παράδειγμα τόδε τοῦ λόγου· ἐκ γ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.c) to introduce a detailed description or narration already alluded to, ὅμως δὲ λεκτέα ἃ γιγνώσκω· ἔχει γ. [ἡ χώρα] πεδία κάλλιστα. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.d) in answers to questions or statements challenging assent or denial, yes, no. , οὔκουν. ἀνάγκη ἐστ;—ἀνάγκη γ. οὖν, ἔφη, ay doubtless it is necessary, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱκανὸς γ, ἔφη, συμβαίνει γ, ἔφη, [Refs]; οὔκουν δὴ τό γ᾽ εἰκός.—οὐ γ: [Refs] I.2) by inversion, preceding the fact explained, since, as, Ἀτρεΐδη, πολλοὶ γ. τεθνᾶσιν Ἀχαιοί. τῷ σε χρὴ πόλεμον παῦσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χρόνου δὲ οὐ πολλοῦ διελθόντος (χρῆν γ. Κανδαύλῃ γενέσθαι κακῶς) ἔλεγε πρὸς τὸν Γύγην τοιάδε, Γύγη, οὐ γ. σε δοκέω πείθεσθαι. (ὦτα γ. τυγχάνει κτλ.), ποίει ὅκως. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἶεν, σὺ γ. τούτων ἐπιστήμων, τί χρὴ ποιεῖ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; the principal proposition is sometimes I.2.b) blended with the causal one, τῇ δὲ κακῶς γ. ἔδεε γενέσθαι εἶπε, i.e. ἡ δέ (κακῶς γ. οἱ ἔδεε γενέσθαι) εἶπε [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2.c) attached to the hypothet. Particle instead of being joined to the apodosis, οὐδ᾽ εἰ γ. ἦν τὸ πρᾶγμα μὴ θεήλατον, ἀκάθαρτον ὑμᾶς εἰκὸς ἦν οὕτως ἐᾶν, i.e. οὐδὲ γ. εἰ ἦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2.d) repeated, οὐ γ. οὖν σιγήσομαι· ἔτικτε γ. [Refs] I.3) in elliptical phrases, where that of which γάρ gives the reason is omitted, and must be supplied, I.3.a) frequently in Trag. dialogue and [Refs 5th c.BC+], when yes or no may be supplied from the context, καὶ δῆτ᾽ ἐτόλμας τούσδ᾽ ὑπερβαίνειν νόμου;—οὐ γ. τί μοι Ζεὺς ἦν ὁ κηρύξας τάδε [yes], for it was not Zeus, etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in phrase ἔστι γ. οὕτω [yes], for so it is, i. e. yes certainly: λέγεταί τι καινό; γένοιτο γ. ἄν τι καινότερον ἢ; [why,] could there be? [Refs 5th c.BC+] [do so], yet shall ye never prevail by this means: for ἀλλὰ γ, see below[Refs] I.3.b) to confirm or strengthen something said, οἵδ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ εἰσί· τοῦτο γάρ σε δήξεται [I say this], for it will sting thee, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: after an Exclamation, ὦ πόποι· ἀνάριθμα γ. φέρω πήματα [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.3.c) in conditional propositions, where the condition is omitted, else, οὐ γ. ἄν με ἔπεμπον πάλιν (i.e. εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευον) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γίνεται γ. ἡ κοινωνία συμμαχία for in that case, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I.4) in abrupt questions, why, what, τίς γ. σε θεῶν ἐμοὶ ἄγγελον ἧκε; why who hath sent thee? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πατροκτονοῦσα γ. ξυνοικήσεις ἐμο; what, wilt thou? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; what, was it? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί γ; quid enim? i. e. it must be so, [Refs]; τί γ. δή ποτ; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also πῶς γ; πῶς γ. ο;, see at {πῶς}. I.5) to strengthen a wish, with optative, κακῶς γ. ἐξόλοιο O that you might perish! [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare αἴ, εἰ, εἴθε, πῶς. II) joined with other Particles: II.1) ἀλλὰ γ. where γάρ gives the reason of a clause to be supplied between ἀλλά and itself, as ἀλλ᾽ ἐν γὰρ Τρώων πεδίῳ. but [far otherwise], for, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἥκουσ᾽ αἵδ᾽ ἐπὶ πρᾶγος πικρόν but [hush], for, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γ. σ᾽ ἐθέλω. but [look out] for, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) γ. ἄρα for indeed, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) γ. δή for of course, for you know, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φάμεν γ. δή yes certainly we say so, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) γ. νυ [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.5) γ. οὖν for indeed, to confirm or explain, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φησὶ γ. οὖν yes of course he says so, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare τοιγαροῦν. II.6) γ. που for I suppose, especially with negatives, [Refs] II.7) γ. ῥα, ={γὰρ ἄρα}, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.8) γ. τε, [Refs]; also τε γ. [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.9) γ. τοι for surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare τοιγάρτοι. B) POSITION: γάρ properly stands after the first word in a clause, but in Pocts it frequently stands third or fourth, when the preceding words are closely connected, as ὁ μὲν γὰρ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χἠ ναῦς γὰρ. [Refs]; τό τ᾽ εἰκαθεῖν γὰρ. [Refs]; τὸ μὴ θέμις γὰρ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]: sometimes for metrical reasons, where there is no such connexion, as third [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in later Comedy texts fifth [Refs 4th c.BC+]; once sixth in [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) inserted before the demonstrative -ί, as νυνγαρί for νυνὶ γά; compare νυνί. C) QUANTITY: γάρ is sometimes long in [Refs 8th c.BC+].—In Attic dialect always short: [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strongs

Word:

γάρ

Transliteration:

gár

Pronounciation:

gar

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Conjunction

Definition:

properly, assigning a reason (used in argument, explanation or intensification; often with other particles); and, as, because (that), but, even, for, indeed, no doubt, seeing, then, therefore, verily, what, why, yet; a primary particle

maybe

Strongs:

g302

Lexicon:

ἄν

Greek:

ἂν

Transliteration:

an

Usage:

183 times in 14 books, 96 chapters, and 168 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

if

Morphhology:

Particle or Disjunctive Particle

Grammar:

introducing an alternative

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ἄν

Transliteration:

an

Gloss:

if

Morphhology:

Greek Conditional

Definition:

ἄν, conditional particle, which cannot usually be separately translated in English, its force depending on the constructions which contain it (see further, LS, see word; WM, §xlii; M, Pr., 165 ff; MM, VGT, see word). 1) In apodosis, (i) with indic, imperfect or aor, expressing what would be or would have been if (εἰ with impf, aor. or plpf.) some condition were or had been fulfilled: Luk.7:39 17:6, Jhn.5:46, Gal.1:10, Mat.12:7 24:43, 1Co.2:8, Act.18:14, 1Jn.2:19, al. The protasis is sometimes understood (as also in cl.): Mat.25:27, Luk.19:23. In hypothetical sentences, expressing unreality, ἄν (as often in late writers, more rarely in cl.) is omitted: Jhn.8:39 15:24 19:11, Rom.7:7, Gal.4:15; (ii) with opt, inf, ptcp. (cl; see LS, see word; M, Int., §275; M, Pr., 167:4). 2) In combination with conditional, relative, temporal, and final words; (i) as in cl, with subj, (a) in protasis with εἰ, in Attic contr. ἐάν, which see; (b) in conditional, relative, and temporal clauses (coalescing with ὅτε, ἐπεί, etc; see: ὅταν, ἐπάν, etc.), ever, soever; (α) with pres, ἡνίκα, 2Co.3:15; ὃς ἄν, Rom.9:15 (LXX) 16:2, al; ὅσοι ἄν, Luk.9:5; ὡς ἄν, Rom.15:24 (M, Pr., 167); (β) with aor, ὃς ἄν, Mat.5:21, 22, 31; ἕως ἄν, until, Mat.2:13, Mrk.6:10, al; ὡς ἄν, as soon as (M, Pr., 167), 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. On the frequently use of ἐάν for ἄν with the foregoing words, see: ἐάν; (ii) in late Gk, when some actual fact is spoken of, with indic: ὅταν (which see); ὅπου ἄν, Mrk.6:56 (M, Pr., 168); καθότι ἄν, Act.2:45 4:35; ὡς ἄν, 1Co.12:2. 3) in iterative construction, with imperfect and aor. indic. (M, Pr., 167): Act.2:45 4:35, 1Co.12:2. 4) with optative, giving a potential sense to a question or wish: Act.8:31 26:29. 5) Elliptical constructions: εἰ μή τι ἄν (M, Pr., 169), 1Co.7:5; ὡς ἄν, with inf, as it were (op. cit. 167), 2Co.10:9. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ἄν

Transliteration:

an

Gloss:

if

Morphhology:

Greek Conditional

Definition:

ἄν, [ᾰ], Epic dialect, Lyric poetry, Ionic dialect, [Refs 4th c.AD+], Attic dialect; also κεν) Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, Thess, κᾱ Doric dialect, Boeotian dialect, El; the two combined in Epic dialect (below [Refs 4th c.BC+], εἰκ ἄν[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyric poetry about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by [Refs 8th c.BC+] in negative clauses, κε (ν) with the relative. A) In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come. A.I) WITH INDICATIVE: A.I.1) with historical tenses, generally imperfect and aorist, less frequently pluperfect, never perfect, see below, A.I.1.a) most frequently in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apodosis expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The imperfect with ἄν refers to continued action, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always in past time, except perhaps καί κε θάμ᾽ ἐνθάδ᾽ ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ᾽[Refs 8th c.BC+]; later also in present time, first in [Refs 6th c.BC+]; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. The aorist strictly refers only to past time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, [Refs 4th c.BC+], but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc, as we say I should have said, εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ᾽, εἶπον ἄν σ᾽ οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν[Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt,[Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.1.b) the protasis is frequently understood: ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear would have seized even the stout-hearted (had he heard the sound), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ γὰρ ἔρυμα τῷ στρατοπέδῳ οὐκ ἂν ἐτειχίσαντο they would not have built the wall (if they had not won a battle), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πολλοῦ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἄξια for (if that were so) they would be worth much, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὅ τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε for there was nothing which you could have done, i. e. would have done (if you had tried), [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.I.1.c) with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially with τάχα, which see, ἀλλ᾽ ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ᾽ ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (i.e. διέβησαν) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.1.d) ἄν is frequently omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc, and sometimes for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.2) with future indicative: A.I.2.a) frequently in Epic dialect, usually with κεν, rarely ἄν, [Refs 8th c.BC+] and he will likely be angry to whom-soever I shall come, [Refs]; καί κέ τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει and in that case men will say,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Lyric poetry, μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ[Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.2.b) rarely in codices of Attic dialect Prose writers, σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε[Refs 5th c.BC+]future infinitive and participle see below A.II) WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in Epic dialect, the meaning being the same as with the future indicative [Refs]I will take her myself, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, [Refs]; also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future, οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις[Refs] A.III) WITH OPTATIVE (never future, rarely perfect πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.a) in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in optative with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a future condition: ἀλλ᾽ εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη[Refs 8th c.BC+] present and aorist optative with κε or ἄν are sometimes used like imperfect and aorist indicative with ἄν in Attic, with either regular indicative or another optative in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο. εἰ μὴ. νόησε κτλ, i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ᾽ ἂν ἐγὼ. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.b) with protasis in present or future, the optative with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ᾽ εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.c) with protasis understood: φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν δ᾽ οὔ κε δύ᾽ ἀνέρε. ἀπ᾽ οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, [Refs 8th c.BC+] sometimes with reference to past time, Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη[Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III.d) with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ᾽ ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like, Latin velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ᾽ ἄ; which way then can we turn? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴησαν δ᾽ ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, [Refs 5th c.BC+] i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.e) in questions, expressing a wish: τίς ἂν θεῶν. δοί;[Refs 5th c.BC+] as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty, τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν[Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, [Refs]; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.f) in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, [Refs]; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ᾽ ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.g) rarely omitted with optative in apodosis: ῥεῖα θεός γ᾽ ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Trag, θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις[Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.h) ἄν with future optative is probably always corrupt (compare [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν᾽ ἂν καταλήψοιτο (οὐδένα Bekk.) [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) WITH infinitive and participle (sometimes adjective equivalent to participle, τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι[Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV.1) present infinitive or participle: A.IV.1.a) representing imperfect indicative, οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττει; do you think he would not have kept them safe? (οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV.1.b) representing present optative, πόλλ᾽ ἂν ἔχων (representing ἔχοιμ᾽ ἄν) ἕτερ᾽ εἰπεῖν παραλείπω[Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV.2) aorist infinitive or participle: A.IV.2.a) representing aorist indicative, οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ᾽ αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖ; do you not think he would even have run thither? (καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV.2.b) representing aorist optative, οὐδ᾽ ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land (οὐδ᾽ ἂν κρατήσειαν), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν (ληφθείη ἄν) [Refs]; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen (ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), [Refs] A.IV.3) perfect infinitive or participle representing: A.IV.3.a) pluperfect indicative, πάντα ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι (φήσειεν ἄν) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians (ἑαλώκη ἄν), [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.IV.3.b) perfect optative, οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered (δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV.4) future infinitive or participle, never in Epic dialect, and probably always corrupt in Attic dialect, νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (to be read -ῆσαι) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle is still more exceptional, ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; both are found in later Gk, νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα[Refs 2nd c.BC+]; with participle, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B) IN DEPENDENT CLAUSE[Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I) In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν (ᾱ) (which see): [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, compare ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν (Ionic dialect ἐπεάν), ἐπειδάν: [Refs 8th c.BC+], ἐπήν, εὖτ᾽ ἄ; see also εἰσόκε (εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ᾽ ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ᾽ ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος. ὅς χ᾽ ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ whoever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, [Refs 8th c.BC+]subjunctive in both the above constructions [Refs] without ἄ; also Trag. and Comedy texts, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subjunctive without ἄν in prose, e.g. [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μέχρι οὗ), [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) in final clauses introduced by relative adverbs, as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), frequently in Epic dialect, σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after ὡς in [Refs 5th c.BC+] indicative is regular in _Attic dialect_); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε except ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν. φύγοιμεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] = where in [Refs 5th c.BC+] = lest, takes ἄν only with optative in apodosis, as [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) in Epic dialect sometimes with OPTATIVE as with subjunctive (always κε (ν), except εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὥς κε. δοίη ᾧ κ᾽ ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please,[Refs 8th c.BC+] belongs to Verb in apodosis, as in ὡς δ᾽ ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο[Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relative or temporary word retains an ἄν which it would have with subjunctive in direct form, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—similarly after a preceding optative, οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν. σκέψαιο[Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III) rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in Epic dialect: B.III.1) with future indicative as with subjunctive: αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται[Refs 8th c.BC+] B.III.2) with εἰ and a past tense of indicative, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ᾽ ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ᾽ ἐβούλετο Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.IV) in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο[NT+4th c.AD+]; ἔνθ᾽ ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι[Refs 6th c.AD+]; compare ἐάν, ὅταν. C) with imperfect and more rarely aorist indicative in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; frequently in [Refs 5th c.BC+] she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119; εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν, ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive representing imperfect of this construction, ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire (ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), [Refs 4th c.BC+] D) GENERAL REMARKS: D.I) POSITION OF ἄν. D.I.1) in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relative word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, γάρ, καί, νυ, περ, etc; as εἰ μέν κεν. εἰ δέ κε[Refs 8th c.BC+]; rarely by τις, as ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ[Refs 8th c.BC+] two such Particles may precede κε, as εἴ περ γάρ κεν[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; rarely in Prose, ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν[Refs 5th c.BC+] D.I.2) in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, especially an interrogative, a negative (e. g. οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθ; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? (εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), [Refs 4th c.BC+] D.I.3) ἄν is frequently separated from its infinitive by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc, οὐκ ἂν οἴει; frequently in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ᾽ ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) [Refs 5th c.BC+] D.I.4) ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause, ἀλλ᾽, ὦ μέλ᾽, ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει[Refs 5th c.BC+] D.II) REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words, ὥστ᾽ ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ᾽ ἄν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ᾽ ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ᾽ ἴσθ᾽ ἄν, εἰ. [Refs] D.II.2) ἄν is coupled with κε (ν) a few times in [Refs 8th c.BC+] D.III) ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sometimes the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (i.e. ἔρρεγκον) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί δ᾽ ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (i.e. πρᾶξαι), εἰ τάδ᾽ ἤνυσε;[Refs 4th c.BC+] —so in phrases like{πῶς γὰρ ἄν}; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (i.e. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (i.e. ἐφρόνησαν) εἰ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (i.e. ἴητε) [Refs 5th c.BC+] D.IV) ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others: πείθοι᾽ ἂν εἰ πείθοι᾽· ἀπειθοίης δ᾽ ἴσως[Refs 4th c.BC+]: even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, [Refs 5th c.BC+] is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis,[Refs 5th c.BC+] B) ἄν, [ᾱ], Attic dialect, ={ἐάν},{ἤν}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ[Refs 4th c.BC+]: not common in earlier Attic dialect Inscrr, [NT+4th c.BC+] C) ἄν or ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, (which see) D) ἄν, shortened from ἄνα, see entry ἀνά G.

Strongs

Word:

ἄν

Transliteration:

án

Pronounciation:

an

Language:

Greek

Definition:

(what-, where-, wither-, who-)soever; a primary particle, denoting a supposition, wish, possibility or uncertainty

He

Strongs:

g1565

Greek:

ἐκεῖνος

Transliteration:

ekeinos

Usage:

276 times in 17 books, 121 chapters, and 264 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

that

Morphhology:

Demonstrative pronoun Nominative Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a reference to SPECIFIC a male person or thing that is doing something

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ἐκεῖνος

Transliteration:

ekeinos

Gloss:

that

Morphhology:

Greek Demonstrative Pronoun

Definition:

ἐκεῖνος, -η, -ο (ἐκεῖ), [in LXX chiefly for הַהוּא,הוּא, and cogn. forms;] demonstr. pron., that person or thing (ille), implying remoteness as compared with οὗτος (hic); 1) absol, emphatic he, she, it: opposite to οὗτος, Luk.18:14, Jas.4:15; ἡμεῖς, Heb.12:25; ὑμεῖς, Mrk.4:11; ἄλλοι, Jhn.9:9; ἐγώ, Jhn.3:30; to persons named, Mk 16:[10, 13, 20], Jhn.2:21; of one (absent) who is not named, contemptuously (Abbott, JG, §§2385, 2732), Jhn.7:11 9:28; with respect, of Christ, 1Jo.2:6 3:3, al; referring to a preceding noun, Mrk.16:[10], Jhn.7:45; resumption of a participial subject, Jhn.1:33 9:37 10:1, Rom.14:14, al. (on its reference in Jhn.19:35, see Westc, in l; Moffatt, Intr., 568; Sanday, Fourth Gospel, 77ff.). 2) As adj., joined, like οὗτος, to a noun with the article: Mat.7:25, Mrk.3:24, Jhn.18:15, al; esp. of time, past or future: ἐν τ. ἡμέραις ἐ, Mat.3:1, Mrk.1:9, Act.2:18 " (LXX), al; ἐν ἐ. τ. ἡμέρᾳ, esp of the Parousia, Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, 2Th.1:10, 2Ti.1:12; adverbially, ἐκεινής (sc. ὁδοῦ) = cl. ἐκεινῇ (Bl, §36, 13), that way, Luk.19:4. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ἐκεῖνος

Transliteration:

ekeinos

Gloss:

that

Morphhology:

Greek Demonstrative Pronoun

Definition:

ἐκεῖνος, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο, also κεῖνος (regular in Epic dialect, Ionic dialect (as [Refs 5th c.BC+] only where the metre requires,[Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but not in Attic dialect Prose, and in Comedy texts only in mock Trag. passages): Aeolic dialect κῆνος [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Doric dialect τῆνος [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: in Comedy texts, strengthened ἐκεινοσί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκεινοσίν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: (ἐκεῖ):—demonstrative pronoun the person there, that person or thing, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: generally with reference to what has gone immediately before, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but when οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος refer to two things before mentioned, ἐκεῖνος, properly belongs to the more remote, in time, place, or thought, οὗτος to the nearer, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sometimes = the latter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἆρ᾽ οὗτός ἐστ᾽ ἐκεῖνος ὅν; [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also joined as if one pronoun, τοῦτ᾽ ἐκεῖνο.δέρκομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνο καιροῦ at that point of time, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνο, à propos, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] 2) to denote wellknown persons, etc, κεῖνος μέγας θεός [Refs 8th c.BC+] 2.b) ἐκεῖνα the ideal world, [Refs] 3) for things, of which one cannot remember or must not mention the name, ={ὁ δεῖνα}, so-and-so, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 3.b) in formulae, τεθνάτω καὶ οἱ παῖδες οἱ ἐξ ἐκείνου [Refs] 4) with simple demonstrative force, Ἶρος ἐκεῖνος ἧσται Irus sits there, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νῆες ἐκεῖναι ἐπιπλέουσιν there are ships sailing up, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 5) in indirect speech where properly the reflexive pronoun αὑτοῦ would stand, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 6) after a Relat. in apodosi almost pleonastic, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 7) in Aeolic dialect and Attic dialect the substantive with ἐκεῖνος properly has the Article (κῆνος ὤνηρ [Refs 7th c.BC+] may precede or follow the substantive, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν στρατείαν ἐ, τὸν ἄνδρ᾽ ἐ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but when this is the case in Prose, ἐκεῖνος follows the substantive, ἡμέρας ἐκείνης [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) adverb ἐκείνως in that case, [Refs]; in that way, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect κείνως [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) dative feminine ἐκείνῃ as adverb, III.1) of Place, at that place, in that neighbourhood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κείνῃ (i.e. ὁδῷ) [Refs 8th c.BC+] III.2) of Manner, in that manner, [Refs 5th c.BC+] IV) with Preps, ἐξ ἐκείνου from that time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνα in that region, [Refs 5th c.BC+]afterwards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare ἐπέκεινα.

Strongs

Word:

ἐκεῖνος

Transliteration:

ekeînos

Pronounciation:

ek-i'-nos

Language:

Greek

Definition:

that one (or (neuter) thing); often intensified by the article prefixed; he, it, the other (same), selfsame, that (same, very), X their, X them, they, this, those; from g1563 (ἐκεῖ)

shall do,

Strongs:

g4160G

Strongs extended:

g4160, g4160G, g4160H, g4160I, g4160J

Lexicon:

ποιέω

Greek:

ποιῇ,

Transliteration:

poiēa

Usage:

566 times in 26 books, 186 chapters, and 509 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

these things

Strongs:

g3778

Lexicon:

οὗτος

Greek:

ταῦτα

Transliteration:

tauta

Usage:

1425 times in 27 books, 244 chapters, and 1292 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

also

Strongs:

g2532

Lexicon:

καί

Greek:

καὶ

Transliteration:

kai

Usage:

9585 times in 27 books, 260 chapters, and 5307 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

and

Morphhology:

Conjunction

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

καί

Transliteration:

kai

Gloss:

and

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

καί

Transliteration:

kai

Gloss:

and

Morphhology:

Greek Conjunction

Definition:

καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.

Strongs

Word:

καί

Transliteration:

kaí

Pronounciation:

kahee

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Conjunction

Definition:

and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force

the

Strongs:

g3588

Greek:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Usage:

20754 times in 27 books, 260 chapters, and 7041 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Definite article Nominative Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a SPECIFIC male person or thing that is doing something

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Gloss:

the/this/who

Morphhology:

Greek Article

Definition:

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strongs

Word:

ὁ

Transliteration:

ho

Pronounciation:

to

Language:

Greek

Definition:

the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article

Son

Strongs:

g5207

Lexicon:

υἱός

Greek:

υἱὸς

Transliteration:

huios

Usage:

382 times in 20 books, 135 chapters, and 348 verses

Context:

Next word

Toggle Lexicon

Gloss:

son

Morphhology:

Noun Nominative Singular Masculine

Grammar:

a male PERSON OR THING that is doing something

Source:

[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources

Editions:

NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR, Byz

Tyndale

Word:

υἱός

Transliteration:

uhios

Gloss:

son

Morphhology:

Greek Noun Male

Definition:

υἱός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX very frequently and nearly always for בֵּן, Gen.4:17, al; for בַּר, Dan LXX TH 7:13, al; etc;], a son; 1) in the ordinary sense: Mat.10:37, Mrk.9:17, Luk.1:13, al. mult; omitted with the art. of origin (WM, §30, 3; Bl, §35, 2), τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, Act.13:22 (LXX); also with genitive anarth. (cl.), Σώπατρος Πύρρου Βεροιαῖος, Act.20:4; with adj, προτότοκος, Luk.2:7; μονογένης, Luk.7:12; opposite to νόθος, Heb.12:8; in a wider sense, of posterity: ὁ υἱ. Δαυΐδ, of the Messiah (cf. Dalman, Words, 316ff; DCG, ii, 653f.), Mat.22:42, 45 Mrk.12:35, 37 Luk.20:41, 44 al; υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ, (cf. υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, Hom, Il., i, 162, al.), Mat.27:9, Act.9:15, al. 2) Metaphorical; (a) as belonging to, being connected with or having the quality of that which follows (a usage mainly due to translation from a Semitic original; cf. Deiss, BS, 161ff; Dalman, Words, 115f; DCG, ii, 652f.): τ. πονεροῦ (διαβόλου), Mat.13:38, Act.13:10; τ. νυμφῶνος (see: νυμφών), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:19, al; τ. φωτός (Lft, Notes, 74), Luk.16:8, Jhn.12:36, 1Th.5:5; τ. εἰρεήμης, Luk.10:6; γεέννης, Mat.23:15; τ. ἀπωλείας, Jhn.17:12, 2Th.2:3; τ. αἰῶνος τούτου, Luk.16:8 20:34; τ. ἀπειθειάς, Eph.2:2 5:6; βροντῆς, Mrk.3:17; τ. ἀναστάσεως, Luk.20:36; παρακλήσεως, Act.4:36; τ. προφητῶν κ. τ. διαθήκης, Act.3:25; (b) υἱὸς τ. θεοῦ (cf. Dalman, Words, 268ff; Deiss, BS, 166f; DB, iv, 570 ff; DCG, ii, 654ff.), of men, as partakers of the Divine nature and of the life to come: Mat.5:9, Luk.20:36, Rom.8:14 9:26, al; υἱοὶ (κ. θυγατέρες) τ. ὑψίστου, Luk.6:35, 2Co.6:18; in an unique sense of Jesus, Mat.4:3 8:29 28:19, Mrk.3:4, Luk.4:41, Jhn.9:35 11:27, al; ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱ. τ. θεοῦ ζῶντος (τ. εὐλογητοῦ), Mat.16:16, Mrk.14:61; (with) (ὁ) υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου (in LXX for Heb. בּן אדם, Aram, בּר אנשׁ; cf. Dalman, Words, 234ff; DB, iv, 579ff; DCG, ii, 659ff; Westc, St. John, i, 74ff; other reff. in Swete, Mk, 2:10), based on the Aram. of Dan.7:13, where the phrase, like the corresponding Heb. (as in Psa.8:5), means a man, one of the species, and indicates the human appearance of the person in question. It is used of the Messiah in Enoch, with 46, §1-4, also in II Est.13:3, 12, al. Our Lord first makes the phrase a title, using the def. art. It seems to combine the ideas of his true humanity and representative character. Exc. in Act.7:56 and (anarth.) Rev.1:13 14:14, it is used of Jesus only by himself: Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:10, Luk.5:24, Jhn.1:52, al. (AS)

Liddell-Scott-Jones

Word:

υἱός

Transliteration:

uhios

Gloss:

son

Morphhology:

Greek Noun Male

Definition:

υἱός, ὁ (written ϝηιός in Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. [Refs 6th c.BC+] —in earlier _Attic dialect_ and other Inscrr. inflected as a ῠ-stem (like πῆχυς), _nominative_ υἱύς (written huihus)[Refs]; dative υἱεῖ: dual υἱεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+], written ηυιε in [Refs 5th c.BC+] are rejected by [Refs 2nd c.AD+], Thom.Mag.p.367 R, as not Attic dialect, though the two latter forms are used by later writers (as υἱέα [Refs 3rd c.BC+] is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is mentioned as a form that would be regular by [Refs] —Homer uses _nominative_ υἱός (very frequently); genitive υἱοῦ only in [Refs 8th c.BC+], elsewhere υἱέο; dative υἱέϊ or υἱε; accusative υἱέα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: plural, nominative υἱέες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative υἱοῖσι (ν) only [Refs 8th c.BC+], belongs solely to later Epic dialect poets, as [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (υιυις lapis); accusative υἱύν [Refs]; genitive υἱέος [Refs 6th c.BC+]; but υἱοῦ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; nominative plural υἱέες [Refs]; accusative plural υἱύνς [Refs 8th c.BC+] which have ρα = ṛ, cf. Sanskrit pitṛ[snull]u); ὑέεσσι [Refs]; υἷος in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is nominative rather than genitive in [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; a nominative ὑϊς (scanned?~X) [Refs 6th c.BC+]-in Attic dialect Inscrr. down to [Refs 5th c.BC+] reappears under the Empire; in Plato codex A usually has ὑιος, which is found also in T, codex B always has υἱός, editors restore ὑό; accusative υἱόν is recommended by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] [same place]; in Inscrr. of Pergamon, Magnesia, and Delphi, and in non-literary Papyri, ὑός is at all times less common than υἱός:—ὁ υεἱός [Refs]:—son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; υἱὸν ποιεῖσθαί τινα to adopt as a son, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; υἱεῖς ἄνδρες grown-up sons, [Refs 4th c.BC+] Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely of animals, [NT] 2) periphrastic, υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, for Ἀχαιοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 3) generally, child, and so υἱ. ἄρρην male child, [NT+3rd c.AD+] 4) frequently in [Refs] years old, [LXX]; υἱοὶ ἀδικίας [Refs]hostages, [LXX+NT] 5) in some dialects, including the Ionic dialect Prose of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is rare in Trag, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 6) as a general term of affection, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; υἱέ, an author's address to the reader, [LXX] 7) δάμου υἱός, υἱὸς πόλεως, Ἑλλάδος, as titles of honour, [Refs 1st c.AD+] 8) υἱοὶ ἀνθρώπων sons of men, periphrastic for men (compare above 2,4), [LXX]; οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀ.[LXX+NT]man, [LXX]; of the Messiah,[LXX+NT]; used by Jesus of himself, [NT] (by Stephen recalling the words of Jesus, [NT] 9) υἱοὶ Θεοῦ sons of God, implying inheritors of the nature of God [NT]; implying participants in the glory of God, [Refs] 9.b) of Jesus, τὸ γεννώμενον κληθήσεται υἱὸς Θεοῦ [Refs]; ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ, [NT] 9.c) Θεοῦ υἱός, = Latin [Refs] filius, patronymic of Augustus, [Refs 4th c.BC+]. [Hom.sometimes has the first syllable short in nominative, vocative and accusative singular, οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Simon. [prev. cited] seems to have used a monosyllable nominative υἷς, and Hdn.Gr. may have read it as ὕις, but this is uncertain, as in [Refs 8th c.BC+] does not occur.] (Prob. from *sū-yú-s, cf. Sanskrit sūte 'procreate', Tocharian (A-dialogue) se, (B-dialogue) soyä 'son'; different suffix in *sū-nu-s, Sanskrit sūnūs, etc, and in *s[ucaron]-nu-s, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] sunu, etc. (all = son); *sūyú- perhaps became *s[ucaron]wyú, then *suiwú; υἱός and υἱόν perhaps by dissimilation from υἱύς υἱύν, since the o-stem forms appear first where υ-υ would otherwise be repeated; ὗϊς (ὑΐς) may be another dissimilation; the precise origin of υἷος υἷι υἷες etc. is uncertain.)

Strongs

Word:

υἱός

Transliteration:

huiós

Pronounciation:

hwee-os'

Language:

Greek

Morphhology:

Noun Masculine

Definition: